SIEBEL DATA WAREHOUSE INSTALLATION AND

ADMINISTRATION GUIDE
VERSION 7.7, REV. A
MARCH 2004
Siebel Systems, Inc., 2207 Bridgepointe Parkway, San Mateo, CA 94404
Copyright

2004 Siebel Systems, Inc.

All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America
No part of this publication may be stored in a retrieval system, transmitted, or reproduced in any way, including
but not limited to photocopy, photographic, magnetic, or other record, without the prior agreement and written
permission of Siebel Systems, Inc.
Siebel, the Siebel logo, TrickleSync, Universal Agent, and other Siebel names referenced herein are trademarks
of Siebel Systems, Inc., and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
Other product names, designations, logos, and symbols may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
U.S. GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Programs, Ancillary Programs and Documentation, delivered
subject to the Department of Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement, are commercial computer
software as set forth in DFARS 227.7202, Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software
Documentation, and as such, any use, duplication and disclosure of the Programs, Ancillary Programs and
Documentation shall be subject to the restrictions contained in the applicable Siebel license agreement. All
other use, duplication and disclosure of the Programs, Ancillary Programs and Documentation by the U.S.
Government shall be subject to the applicable Siebel license agreement and the restrictions contained in
subsection (c) of FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights (June 1987), or
FAR 52.227-14, Rights in DataGeneral, including Alternate III (June 1987), as applicable. Contractor/licensor
is Siebel Systems, Inc., 2207 Bridgepointe Parkway, San Mateo, CA 94404.
Proprietary Information
Siebel Systems, Inc. considers information included in this documentation and
in Siebel eBusiness Applications Online Help to be Confidential Information.
Your access to and use of this Confidential Information are subject to the terms
and conditions of: (1) the applicable Siebel Systems software license
agreement, which has been executed and with which you agree to comply; and
(2) the proprietary and restricted rights notices included in this documentation.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 3
Contents
Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 1
Introduction to Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Admin-
istration Guide
Whats New in Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide,
Version 7.7, Rev. A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Chapter 1. Overview of Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Siebel Data Warehouse Architecture Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
About the Data Warehouse Application Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
About DAC Repository Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
About the DAC Process Life Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Chapter 2. Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Configuration Process . . . . . . . . 24
Siebel Data Warehouse Deployment Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Operating System, Driver, and Connectivity Requirements for Siebel Data
Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . 28
IBM DB2 UDB Windows 2000-Specific Database Requirements for Siebel Data
Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
IBM DB2 UDB zOS and OS/390-Specific Database Requirements for Siebel Data
Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Oracle-Specific Database Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . . . 32
Additional Suggestions for Optimizing Oracle Performance in Siebel Data
Contents
4 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
SQL Server-Specific Database Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . 36
Informatica Server Requirements for Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode and Non-
English Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Unicode to Unicode Parameter Settings for Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . . . 40
Code Page (Multibyte/Single-Byte) to Unicode Parameter Settings for Siebel Data
Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Code Page (Multibyte/Single-Byte) to Code Page (Multibyte/Single-Byte)
Parameter Settings for Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Siebel Data Warehouse Unicode and Code Page Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Installing Siebel Data Warehouse-Related Software on Windows . . . . . . . 48
Installing Siebel Analytics (Data Warehouse Option) on Windows . . . . . . . . 49
Installing the Informatica Server and Repository Server on Windows . . . . . . 50
Installing Informatica Client Software on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Siebel Data Warehouse Data Code Pages Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Installing Java SDK and Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Setting Up the DAC Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Creating ODBC Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Creating the SSE Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Configuring the DAC Config.bat File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Starting the DAC Client and Importing Seed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using the DACs Data Warehouse Configurator Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Creating the Informatica Repository (in the DAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring the Informatica Repository (in Repository Server Administration
Console) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Dropping the Informatica Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Configuring the Informatica Repository (in DACs Data Warehouse Configurator)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Creating Data Warehouse Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Dropping Data Warehouse Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Creating Delete Triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 5
Contents
Configuring Informatica Server and Workflow Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Configuring the Informatica Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Configuring the Informatica Repository Server (in the Repository Administration
Console) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Verifying the Informatica Server Host Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Configuring the Informatica Repository Using Workflow Manager . . . . . . . . 70
Starting the Informatica Service on Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Adding the PATH Environment Variable for the DAC Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Configuring Database Parameter Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Setting DAC ETL Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting Up DAC System Properties and Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting Up DAC System Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Registering Informatica Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Creating Database Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Configuring Email Recipients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Setting Up the DAC Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting Up Environment Parameters on UNIX (Prerequisite) . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Installing Informatica Software on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting the Environment Variables for Informatica Server on UNIX . . . . . . . 90
Configuring Informatica Repository from Informatica Workflow Manager on
UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Configuring the DAC Client and Server on Solaris and AIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Starting the Informatica Repository Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Starting and Stopping the Informatica Server on UNIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Updating Siebel OLTP Schema Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Backing Up the Siebel Repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Importing the SIF File into the Siebel OLTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Verifying the SIF Patch Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Creating Siebel Stored Procedures for DB2-UDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Contents
6 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Chapter 3. DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Main Toolbar of the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
DAC Toolbars and Right-Click Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Menu Bar of the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
DAC Server Monitor Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
DAC Navigation Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
DAC Editable Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Logging In to the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Pruning Execution Plans in the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Pruning Subject Areas in the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Pruning Table Groups in the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Pruning Tasks and Dependencies in the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Disabling DAC Repository Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Using the DAC Preview Functionality to View Tasks and Dependencies . . . 117
Distributing DAC Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Using the DAC Query Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
DAC Query Commands and Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
DAC Query Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Common DAC Query Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Executing an ETL with the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Handling ETL Failures with the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Chapter 4. DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
About the DAC Execution Plans Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
About the DAC Subject Areas Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
About the DAC Table Groups Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
About the DAC Tables Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 7
Contents
About the DAC Indices Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
About the DAC Task Definitions Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Using SQL Files as an Execution Type in the DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
About the DAC Setup View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
About the DAC System Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
About the DAC Informatica Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
About the DAC Database Connections Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
About the DAC Email Recipients Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
About the DAC Execute View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
About the DAC Execution Plans (Read Only) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
About the DAC Current Run Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
About the DAC Run History Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
About the DAC Scheduler Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
About the DAC Validation Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Chapter 5. Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Siebel Data Warehouse ETL Process Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
About Siebel Data Warehouse Extension Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
About the Siebel Data Warehouse DATASRC_NUM_ID Column . . . . . . . . . 166
Working with the Custom Folder of the Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . . . . . 166
Creating Custom Informatica Workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Important Notes About Siebel Data Warehouse Customizations . . . . . . . . 169
Standard Templates for Siebel Data Warehouse Customizations . . . . . . . 172
Fact Templates for Siebel Data Warehouse Customizations . . . . . . . . . . 173
Customization Steps for Siebel Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Adding a Column From a Main Source Table in the Siebel OLTP . . . . . . . . 175
Adding a Column From a Related Source Table in the Siebel OLTP . . . . . . 175
Modifying an Existing Column in the Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . 177
Adding a New Dimension in the Siebel Data Warehouse and Using It with an
Existing Fact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Contents
8 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Adding a New Fact Table in the Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Adding a New Dimension Table for a New Fact Table in the Siebel Data
Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data . . . . . . 180
Adding New Data as a Whole Row into the Standard Dimension Table in Siebel
Data Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Adding New Data as a Whole Row into the Standard Fact Table in Siebel Data
Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Adding a Column in a Standard Dimension Table in Siebel Data Warehouse . .
189
Adding a Column for a Standard Fact Table in Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . 191
Building a Custom Dimension Table from External Sources in Siebel Data
Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Linking the Custom Dimension to a Standard Fact Table in Siebel Data
Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Building Custom Fact Tables from External Sources in Siebel Data Warehouse .
194
Chapter 6. Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Understanding Siebel Data Warehouse Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Executing Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Chapter 7. Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Upgrade Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse 7.7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Siebel Data Warehouse 7.7 Product Changes and Customization Impacts . 208
Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Approaches to Upgrading the Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Process of Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Data Migration Workflows for Siebel Data Warehouse Data Upgrades . . . 213
Running the Data Migration Workflow for Preconfigured Content in Siebel
Data Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 9
Contents
Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade Customizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Data Migration Workflows for Siebel Industry Applications Data Warehouse
Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Running the Data Migration Workflow for Preconfigured Siebel Industry
Applications Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Chapter 8. Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Initial Configuration Issues . . . . . . 225
Informatica and Loading Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Unicode Issues with Informatica and the Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . . . 230
UNIX Installation Issues with the Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Siebel Data Warehouse Application Console (DAC) Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Appendix A. Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data
Considerations
Importing Syndicated Data into Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Siebel Analytics Data Loading Matrix for Syndicated Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Data Source Values for Syndicated Data Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Data Loading Issues with Siebel Data Warehouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Supported Incremental Updates in the Siebel Data Warehouse LS Dimension
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Index
Contents
10 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 11
Introduction to Siebel Data Warehouse
Installation and Administration Guide
Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide explains how to
install, configure, and administer the Siebel Data Warehouse (the physical data
warehouse database) and its related components. Before it can be installed, the
Siebel Data Warehouse database must be created manually by a database
administrator.
Although job titles and duties at your company may differ from those listed in the
following table, the audience for this guide consists primarily of employees in these
categories:
This guide assumes that you are knowledgeable in the areas of relational databases,
decision support systems, dimensional design, and the operating system under
which you are running the Siebel Analytics components.
Product Modules and Options
This guide contains descriptions of modules that are optional and for which you
may not have purchased a license. Siebels Sample Database also includes data
related to these optional modules. As a result, your software implementation may
differ from descriptions in this guide. To find out more about the modules your
organization has purchased, see your corporate purchasing agent or your Siebel
sales representative.
Database
Administrators
Administrators who administer the database system, including data
loading, system monitoring, backup and recovery, space allocation and
sizing, and user account management.
Siebel Application
Administrators
Administrators who plan, set up, and maintain Siebel applications.
Siebel Application
Developers
Developers who plan, implement, and configure Siebel applications,
possibly adding new functionality.
Siebel System
Administrators
Administrators responsible for the whole system, including installing,
maintaining, and upgrading Siebel applications.
Introduction to Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide
Whats New in Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide, Version 7.7, Rev. A
12 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Whats New in Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and
Administration Guide, Version 7.7, Rev. A
NOTE: Siebel Analytics version 7.7 is compatible with Siebel eBusiness Applications
version 7.5.3.
Table 1. Changes Made in Version 7.7, Rev. A
Topic Revision
IBM DB2 UDB zOS and OS/390-Specific Database
Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse on
page 31
Added information about
requirements specific to Siebel
Data Warehouse for IBM DB2 UDB
zOS and OS/390.
Menu Bar of the DAC on page 105 Enhanced the descriptions for the
DAC Repository Management tool.
DAC Navigation Tree on page 110 Added information about using
the navigation tree in the DAC.
DAC Editable Lists on page 111 Added information about the
editable lists in the DAC.
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs on
page 112
Clarified information about
pruning execution plans and
added information about the
chaining process related to table
groups.
Using the DAC Preview Functionality to View Tasks
and Dependencies on page 117
Clarified the description of the
information available in the
preview.
Distributing DAC Metadata on page 120 Added procedure for distributing
DAC metadata to different
environments.
About the DAC Design View on page 129 Added descriptions of the actions
available in each tab of the DAC
Design view.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 13
Introduction to Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide
Whats New in Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide, Version 7.7, Rev. A
Table 2 lists changes described in version 7.7 of the documentation to support
version 7.7 of the Siebel Analytics software.
About the DAC Setup View on page 150 Added descriptions of the actions
available in each tab of the DAC
Setup view.
About the DAC Execute View on page 152 Added descriptions of the actions
available in each tab of the DAC
Execute view.
Using SQL Files as an Execution Type in the DAC
on page 148
Added procedure for using SQL
files as an execution type in the
DAC. Includes examples of SQL
and XML files.
Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
on page 197
Added information about
executing exception reports in the
DAC.
Table 2. New Product Features in Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Adminis-
tration Guide, Version 7.7
Topic Description
DAC Quick Start on page 99 Describes how to use the Data
Warehouse Application Console
(DAC) to design, execute, and
monitor ETL processes.
DAC Functional Reference on page 129 Provides detailed information
about designing, executing, and
monitoring ETL execution plans.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse on
page 161
Describes how to customize the
preconfigured execution plans.
Unicode Issues with Informatica and the Siebel
Data Warehouse on page 230
Provides troubleshooting
information about Unicode.
UNIX Installation Issues with the Siebel Data
Warehouse on page 232
Provides troubleshooting
information about UNIX.
Table 1. Changes Made in Version 7.7, Rev. A
Topic Revision
Introduction to Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide
Whats New in Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide, Version 7.7, Rev. A
14 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Siebel Data Warehouse Application Console (DAC)
Issues on page 235
Provides troubleshooting
information about the DAC.
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse on page 207 Provides information about
upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
to version 7.7.
Table 2. New Product Features in Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Adminis-
tration Guide, Version 7.7
Topic Description
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 15
Overview of Siebel Data Warehouse
1
The Siebel Data Warehouse (also referred to as the Siebel Relationship Management
Warehouse) is a unified data repository for all customer-centric data. The purpose
of the Siebel Data Warehouse is to support the analytical requirements of Siebel
eBusiness applications.
The Siebel Data Warehouse includes the following:
A data integration engine that combines data from the Siebel transactional
database and other data sources to build a data warehouse.
An open architecture to allow organizations to use third-party analytical tools in
conjunction with the Siebel Data Warehouse using the Siebel Analytics Server.
Optional prebuilt data extractors to incorporate data from external applications
into the Siebel Data Warehouse (licensed separately).
A set of ETL (extract-transform-load) processes that takes data from the Siebel
eBusiness application transactional data (OLTP) and creates the Siebel Data
Warehouse tables.
The Data Warehouse Application Console (DAC), a centralized console for the
set up, configuration, administration, loading, and monitoring of the Siebel Data
Warehouse.
Siebel Data Warehouse Architecture
High-level analytical queries, like those commonly used in Siebel Analytics, scan
and analyze large volumes of data using complex formulas. This process can take
a long time when querying a transactional database, which impacts overall system
performance.
Overview of Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Architecture
16 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
For this reason, the Siebel Data Warehouse was constructed using dimensional
modeling techniques to allow for fast access to information required for decision
making. The Siebel Data Warehouse derives its data from Siebel operational
applications, and uses Informaticas data integration technology to extract,
transform, and load data from the Siebel transactional database into the Siebel Data
Warehouse.
Figure 1 illustrates the Siebel Data Warehouse architecture.
Siebel Data Warehouse Architecture Components
The Siebel Data Warehouse architecture comprises the following components:
Figure 1. Siebel Data Warehouse Architecture
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 17
Overview of Siebel Data Warehouse
About the Data Warehouse Application Console
Informatica Server. Initially loads the Siebel Data Warehouse and performs
subsequent incremental loads. Depending on your business needs, you might
incrementally refresh the Siebel Data Warehouse once a day, once a week, once
a month, or other similar scheduling. When the server is loading or refreshing
the Siebel Data Warehouse, it is recommended that the server be dedicated to
that activity. However, when the ETL server is not loading or refreshing the
Siebel Data Warehouse, you can use it for other purposes.
Informatica Repository Server. Manages the Informatica repository.
Informatica client utilities. Tools that allow you to create and manage the
Informatica repository.
DAC client. A command and control interface for the data warehouse to allow for
set up, configuration, administration, and monitoring of data warehouse
processes.
DAC server. Executes the instructions from the DAC client. The DAC server
manages data warehouse processes, including scheduling, loading of the ETL,
and configuring the subject areas to be loaded. It dynamically adjusts its actions
based on information in the DAC repository.
DAC repository. Stores the metadata (semantics of the Siebel Data Warehouse)
that represents the data warehouse processes.
About the Data Warehouse Application Console
The Data Warehouse Application Console (DAC) is a centralized console, providing
access to the entire Siebel Data Warehouse application. It allows you to create,
configure, and execute modular data warehouse applications in a parallel, high-
performing environment.
Important features of the DAC include the following:
Single command and control point for the Siebel Data Warehouse
Dynamic load balancing of Informatica workflows across servers
Dynamic load balancing of database tasks (non-Informatica) across database
connections and databases
Overview of Siebel Data Warehouse
About the Data Warehouse Application Console
18 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Metadata-driven ETL execution plans and drop and create indices
Registration of Informatica servers, Informatica databases, and source and target
databases
Automated configuration of ETL for full and incremental load of selected data
warehouse subject areas
Intelligent prioritization of sessions in queue during execution based on
estimated run time and other criteria
Structured history tracking and categorization of diagnostic logs by execution
plans rather than by sessions
Customization and extension of data warehouse subject areas
Scheduling and optimal execution of the ETL process based on database and
hardware resources
Restarting of the ETL process from point of failure
Email notification about the status of ETL processes
About DAC Repository Objects
The DAC repository stores application objects in a hierarchical framework that
defines a data warehouse application.
A data warehouse application comprises the following repository objects:
Tables. Physical database tables defined in the database schema. Can be OLTP
or data warehouse tables. Table types can be fact, dimension, hierarchy,
aggregate, and so on.
Table group. A logical grouping of tables that defines a logical relationship
between its component tables. The table group definition is based on a central
or a main table that drives the relationship between itself and the other tables
in the group. For example, table groups can be star schemas based on a central
fact and its dimensions and aggregates.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 19
Overview of Siebel Data Warehouse
About the Data Warehouse Application Console
Subject area. A logical grouping of table groups that is related to a particular
subject or application context. The subject area derives its component tables
indirectly from the table group. Subject Area definitions are used for scheduling.
A subject area or set of subject areas can be scheduled for full or incremental
loads on a single time schedule.
Execution plan. A data transformation plan defined on subject areas that need to
be transformed at certain frequencies of time. An execution plan is defined
based on business requirements for when the data warehouse needs to be
loaded. Execution plans are scheduled in sequence, not in parallel.
Task. A Task can be related to data transformation or database objects. Tasks
typically operate on a set of database tables, but they can be independent of the
database, for example, creating a file or executing an OS command. Tasks can
be of different types, such as extract, load, or batch script, and so on, and can
be classified as pre-ETL or post-ETL.
Dependency Rule. A rule that determines the order in which tasks are executed.
Dependency rules are defined to determine the sequence of when tasks can run,
ensuring that data consistency is maintained for the warehouse. Dependency
rules are defined at the task level.
Schedule. A schedule specifies when and how often an execution plan runs. An
execution plan can be scheduled for different frequencies or recurrences by
defining multiple schedules.
Overview of Siebel Data Warehouse
About the Data Warehouse Application Console
20 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Figure 2 shows the hierarchical relationship among the repository objects.
Figure 2. DAC Object Hierarchy
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 21
Overview of Siebel Data Warehouse
About the Data Warehouse Application Console
About the DAC Process Life Cycle
The DAC is used by different user groups to design, execute, monitor, and diagnose
data warehouse applications. These phases together make up the DAC process life
cycle, as shown in Figure 3.
The phases of the process and the actions associated with them are as follows:
Setup (Data warehouse developer)
Set up database connections
Set up application and database servers
Set up email recipients
Design (Data warehouse developer)
Design data warehouse applications
Define application objects
Execute (Data warehouse/ETL administrator)
Define scheduling parameters to execute data warehouse applications
Figure 3. DAC Process Life Cycle
Overview of Siebel Data Warehouse
About the Data Warehouse Application Console
22 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Deploy data warehouse applications
Access run-time controls to restart or stop currently running schedules
Monitor (Data warehouse/ETL administrator)
Monitor run-time execution of data warehouse applications
Monitor users, DAC repository, and application maintenance jobs
Diagnose (Data warehouse/ETL administrator)
View the schedule diagnostics at run time or offline through log files
Run Exception Report execution plans
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 23
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data
Warehouse 2
This section describes the processes involved in installing the various clients and
servers used for the Siebel Data Warehouse.
NOTE: To install the server components, the computers need to meet the conditions
specified in Siebel System Requirements and Supported Platforms.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Configuration Process
24 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Configuration
Process
Figure 4 shows the sequence of tasks required to complete the Siebel Data
Warehouse installation and configuration process.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 25
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Configuration Process
Figure 4. Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Configuration Process
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Deployment Configuration
26 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Siebel Data Warehouse Deployment Configuration
Figure 5 shows the recommended Siebel Data Warehouse deployment
configuration.
Component 1 hosts all the ETL servers, that is, the Informatica Server,
Informatica Repository Server, and the DAC server.
NOTE: You can install the Informatica Server on other machines as well to
increase performance. The other ETL servers can also be hosted on other
machines.
Component 2 hosts all the ETL clients, that is, the Informatica client tools and
the DAC client.
Figure 5. Siebel Data Warehouse Deployment Configuration
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 27
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Deployment Configuration
Components 3 and 4 are database instances that can be hosted on one or more
machines. The hardware requirements are entirely dependent on your usage and
performance requirements. It is highly recommended that each of these
components be defined in their own database instance to allow for instantiating
parameters that are optimized for each components usage.
NOTE: For more detailed information about system requirements, see Siebel System
Requirements and Supported Platforms.
Operating System, Driver, and Connectivity Requirements for Siebel Data
Warehouse
Table 3 provides the operating system, driver, and connectivity software
requirements for the Siebel Data Warehouse components.
Table 3. OS, Driver and Connectivity Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
Component Operating System Software Connectivity and Driver
1 Solaris
AIX
HP (Informatica
only)
Windows 2000
Informatica
Server 6.2.1
Informatica
Repository Server
6.2.1
DAC Server 7.7
Sun SDK 1.4.1
JDBC drivers
Javamail
2 Windows 2000 Informatica client
tools
DAC client
Sun SDK 1.4.1
JDBC drivers
ODBC drivers
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
28 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data
Warehouse
The Siebel Data Warehouse is a database that contains the dimensional schemas
created by Informatica.
Although it is technically possible to put the Siebel Data Warehouse in the same
database as the Siebel transactional database, it is not recommended for
performance reasons. The Siebel transactional database is structured as an online
transaction processing (OLTP) database, whereas the Siebel Data Warehouse is
structured as an online analytical processing database. Each is optimized for its own
purpose. The reasons for not combining the two databases are:
The analytical queries interfere with normal use of the transactional database,
which is entering and managing individual transactions.
The data in a transactional database is normalized for update efficiency.
Analytical queries join several normalized queries and will be slow (as opposed
to prejoined, denormalized analytical tables).
3 (A)
Siebel DW
Solaris
AIX
HP
Windows 2000
OS/390
Database software
with Siebel Data
Warehouse
Not applicable
3 (B)
ETL
Repositories
Solaris
AIX
HP
Windows 2000
Database software
with ETL repositories
Not applicable
Table 3. OS, Driver and Connectivity Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
Component Operating System Software Connectivity and Driver
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 29
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
Historical data cannot be purged from a transactional database, even if not
required for current transaction processing, because you need it for analysis. (By
contrast, the analytical database is the warehouse for historical as well as
current data.) This causes the transactional database to further slow down.
Transactional databases are tuned for one specific application, and it is not
productive to use these separate transactional databases for analytical queries
that usually span more than one functional application.
The analytical database can be specifically tuned for the analytical queries and
Extract-Transform-Load (ETL) processing. These are quite different from
transactional database requirements.
The Informatica repository stores all of the Informatica object definitions for the
ETL mappings that populate the Siebel Data Warehouse. It is a series of repository
tables that are stored in a database, which can be transactional, analytical, or a
separate database.
The Siebel Data Warehouse works with relational database management systems.
In addition to the general requirements, there are additional database management
systems (DBMS)-specific requirements depending on the DBMS you are using.
IBM DB2 UDB Windows 2000-Specific Database Requirements for Siebel
Data Warehouse
The following requirements apply to DB2 relational database management system
(RDBMS) usage:
ODBC driver for all connections must use the IBM DB2 ODBC Driver.
Make the appropriate connections using DB2 Client Configuration Assistant.
Create the user accounts that access the database. They must have SSE_ROLE
and be set so that the .dll commands can be run (permissions to create tables).
One login user needs to be created in an empty database. The database objects
will be created using this user login.
The recommended baseline parameters are as follows:
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
30 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
MON_HEAP_SZ = 90
JAVA_HEAP_SZ = 2048
SHEAPTHRES = 400000
ASLHEAPSZ = 15
RQRIOBLK = 32767
QUERY_HEAP_SZ = 1000
MAXAGENTS = 400
NUM_POOLAGENTS = 200
FCM_NUM_BUFFERS = 12288
INTRA_PARALLEL = YES
DBHEAP = 16384
DBHEAP = 16384
DATABASE_MEMORY = AUTOMATIC
CATALOGCACHE_SZ = 5558
LOGBUFSZ = 256
UTIL_HEAP_SZ = 10000
BUFFPAGE = 30000
ESTORE_SEG_SZ = 65536
NUM_ESTORE_SEGS = 16
LOCKLIST = 50000
APPGROUP_MEM_SZ = 30000
GROUPHEAP_RATIO = 70
APP_CTL_HEAP_SZ = 5000
SHEAPTHRES_SHR = SHEAPTHRES)
SORTHEAP = 40000
STMTHEAP = 40960
APPLHEAPSZ = 2560
PCKCACHESZ = 800
STAT_HEAP_SZ = 9000
DLCHKTIME = 10000
MAXLOCKS = 50
LOCKTIMEOUT = 1200
MAXAPPLS = 500
AVG_APPLS = 10
MAXFILOP = 500
LOGFILSIZ = 63753
LOGPRIMARY = 200
LOGSECOND = 2
SOFTMAX = 100
LOGRETAIN = OFF
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 31
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
All tables with a prefix of S_ETL need to be in a tablespace separate from the
other OLTP tables. These ETL tables are used by the Siebel Data Warehouse and
should not be part of the routine backup processes.
A complete listing of these tables can be found in Siebel Data Warehouse Data
Model Reference.
IBM DB2 UDB zOS and OS/390-Specific Database Requirements for
Siebel Data Warehouse
The following requirements apply to IBM DB2 RDBMS usage for zOS and OS/390:
The Siebel Analytics applications communicate with IBM DB2 UDB for z/OS and
OS/390 (running on zSeries servers) through IBM DB2 Connect middleware.
The following editions of DB2 Connect are supported:
DB2 Connect Enterprise Edition (EE). This edition is installed on a midtier
server such as an Informatica Server/Client, DAC, and Siebel Analytics.
DB2 Connect Unlimited Edition (UE). This edition provides the functionality
of DB2 Connect Enterprise Edition but is priced differently.
The ODBC driver for all connections must use the IBM DB2 ODBC Driver.
Make the appropriate connections using the DB2 Client Configuration Assistant.
Use the variable settings shown in Table 4.
Table 4. Variable Settings for IBM DB2 UDB zOS and OS/390 Databases
Parameter Recommended Setting Notes
IDTHTOIN 1800
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
32 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Oracle-Specific Database Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
The following requirements apply to Oracle RDBMS usage:
Make the appropriate connections using Oracle Net8 Assistant (for Oracle 8
databases) or Oracle Net Service (for Oracle 9 databases).
Create the user accounts that access the database. They must have SSE_ROLE
and be set so that the .dll commands can be run (permissions to create tables).
Set the tablespace for the Siebel Data Warehouse. Recommended values are
shown in Table 5.
Create a login user with the tablespace as the default tablespace. The database
objects will be created using this user login.
Edit the Init.ora file. Use the recommended baseline parameters shown in
Table 5.
CDSSRDEF Any
STARJOIN 1 This setting indicates
that star join is enabled.
The one table with the
largest cardinality is the
fact table. However, if
there is more than one
table with this
cardinality, star join is
not enabled.
Table 4. Variable Settings for IBM DB2 UDB zOS and OS/390 Databases
Parameter Recommended Setting Notes
Table 5. Recommended Variable Settings for Oracle Databases
Parameter Recommended Setting Notes
Always_anti_join HASH
Cursor_space_for_time TRUE Use only if you do not
have many concurrent
connections.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 33
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
Db_block_lru_latches Set to number of CPUs
Db_block_size 32 k
Db_file_direct_io_count 64
Db_file_multiblock_read_cou
nt
STMAXIO / DB_BLOCK_SIZE
Db_file_multiblock_read_cou
nt
32
Default Pctincrease 0
Hash_area_size 20 MB
Hash_multiblock_io_count 0.5 * (
db_file_multiblock_Read_cou
nt)
Make sure that you are
not using MTS.
Initial Extent 20 MB
Log_buffer 16 MB
Next Extent 20 MB
Optimizer_index_caching Unset Unset this to avoid
nested loops index joins
(as favored by the
optimizer).
Optimizer_index_cost_adjust 100 See the note following
these parameters.
Optimizer_max_permutations 2000 May be applicable to
other schemas in the
database. This means
longer parsing times for
the access paths, but
once these are parsed,
they should remain in
the shared_pool,
provided they do not get
aged out. See notes for
Cursor_space_for_time.
Table 5. Recommended Variable Settings for Oracle Databases
Parameter Recommended Setting Notes
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
34 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Additional Suggestions for Optimizing Oracle Performance in Siebel Data
Warehouse
Siebel eBusiness Applications under Oracle support only binary sorting. If you
are running an Oracle client, do one of the following:
Set the NLS_SORT parameter to BINARY.
Choose a NLS_LANG setting that includes binary.
These settings are required for adequate performance from the Dedicated Web
Client.
Optimizer_mode ALL_ROWS Cost-based.
Query_rewrite_integrity USE_STALE
Rollback_segments Initial, Next, and
Optimum extent size of
50 MB.
Shared_pool_size 150 MB
Sort_area_retained_size 10 MB
Sort_area_size 10 MB
Sort_multiblock_read_count 4
Star_transformation_enabled TRUE
Tablespace At least 50% of Siebel
transactional database size
Make sure the temporary
tablespace has adequate
space.
Number of log file groups 4
Size of each Log file 10 MB
Sga_max_size 700 MB
Table 5. Recommended Variable Settings for Oracle Databases
Parameter Recommended Setting Notes
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 35
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
Make sure that cost-based optimization is enabled in the Oracle development,
test, and production databases and that statistics are kept up to date. Otherwise,
the rule-based optimizer may be used.
Create foreign keys in the Oracle database, but configure Oracle to not enforce
the foreign key relationship. The existence of foreign keys will allow Oracle to
better optimize certain queries. By turning off enforcement, the database load
should not be negatively affected.
In addition, you may also configure the Oracle star-join transformation. This
requires non-enforced foreign keys in Oracle and the creation of necessary
bitmap indices. This task is optional. It may not be necessary, as ongoing
tuning may reach the desired performance goals.
Analyze application for occurrences of highly skewed data that is indexed.
Create histogram statistics for these indices to enable the optimizer to better
To increase data throughput between Siebel Analytics Server and Oracle, change
SDU and TDU settings in listener.ora. The default is 2 KB and can be increased
to 8 KB.
On the server side, edit the listener.ora file. Under the particular SID_LIST entry,
modify SID_DESC as follows:
SID_LIST_LISTENER =
SID_LIST =
SID_DESC = (SDU=8192)(TDU=8192)
ORACLE_HOME = /.....)
SID_NAME = SOLAP)
)
)
On the client side, edit the tnsnames.ora file. Modify the TNS alias by adding
SDU= and TDU= as follows:
myhost_orcl.world=
DESCRIPTION=(SDU=8192)(TDU=8192)
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
36 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
ADDRESS = (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST=myhost)(PORT=1521))
CONNECT_DATA=(SID=ORCL))
)
SQL Server-Specific Database Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
This section lists requirements for SQL Server database usage.
NOTE: SQL Server users must make sure the SQL Server client software is installed.
NOTE: SQL Server databases with binary sort order or case-sensitive dictionary sort
order are supported. Case-insensitive dictionary sort order is not supported.
SQL Server databases should be created with ANSI NULL option selected.
To set the ANSI NULL option
1 In Enterprise Manager, select Database.
2 Right-click and choose Database properties.
3 Click the Options tab and select the box for ANSI NULL default.
In a SQL Server 2000 environment, when loading Analytics tables with international
data, or loading more than one language, modify the DB Library Options setting.
To modify the DB Library Options setting
1 In the program menu Microsoft SQL Server, launch the Client Network utilities.
2 Select the DB Library Options tab.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 37
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
3 Clear the option Automatic ANSI to OEM.
NOTE: SQL Server 2000 automatically tunes many of the server configuration
options, therefore an administrator is required to do little, if any, tuning. Although
these configuration options can be modified, the general recommendation is that
these options be left at their default values, allowing SQL Server to automatically
tune itself based on run-time conditions.
To create the user accounts that access the database
1 Assign these user accounts SSE_ROLE.
2 Set these accounts to run the .dll commands (that is, set permissions to create
tables).
Recommended SQL Server Database Parameters
If necessary, SQL Server components can be configured to optimize performance,
as shown in Table 6.
Table 6. Recommended Variable Settings for SQL Server Databases
Parameter Recommended Setting Notes
Affinity mask 0
Allow updates 0
Awe enabled 0
C2 audit mode 0
Cost threshold for parallelism 5
Cursor threshold 1
Default full-text language 1033
Default language 0
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
38 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Fill factor 95% For insert-intensive
transactions, set Fill
Factor between 90 and
95%. For better query
performance, set Fill
factor to 95 or even
100%.
Index create memory 1024 KB Default is 0
Lightweight pooling 0
Locks 0
Max degree of parallelism 0 Default is 0. This turns
off parallelism. Max
degree of parallelism
should be left at 0, which
means use parallel plan
generation. It should be
set to 1 (use only 1
process) if you run
multithreaded
components (for
example, several EIM
threads).
Max server memory 2000 MB Default is 2147483647
Max text repl size 65536 B
Max worker threads 100 Default is 255
Media retention 0
Min memory per query 1024 KB
Min server memory 500 MB Default is 0
Nested triggers 1
Network packet size 8192 B Default is 4096
Open objects 0
Table 6. Recommended Variable Settings for SQL Server Databases
Parameter Recommended Setting Notes
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 39
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Database Parameters and Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse
SQL Server memory: Make sure adequate memory is available.
Transaction logs and TempDB: Reside on a separate disk from those used by
database data.
Full load: Full Recovery model for the database.
Incremental (Refresh) load: Change from Full to Bulk-Logged Recovery model.
Informatica Server Requirements for Windows 2000
If the Informatica Server runs under Windows 2000, the following requirements
must be in place to use the post-session email feature of Informatica. This feature
sends a confirmation email when the data warehouse is populated with new data.
Priority boost 0
Query governor cost limit 0 Modify to 60 only if CPU
is high.
Query wait 1 sec
Recovery interval 0 min
Remote access 1
Remote login timeout 20 sec
Remote proc trans 0
Remote query timeout 600 sec
Scan for startup procs 0
Set working set size 0
Two-digit year cutoff 2049
User connections 0
User options 0
Table 6. Recommended Variable Settings for SQL Server Databases
Parameter Recommended Setting Notes
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode and Non-English Environments
40 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
A Microsoft Outlook mail client must be configured on the Informatica Server.
This works with most versions of Outlook except Outlook 2000.
Microsoft Outlook must be running on the Microsoft Exchange server.
The account that sends post-session emails must have rights to start the
Informatica service.
The account must have a Microsoft Outlook account.
For more information, see Informaticas user guide on the Siebel eBusiness Third-
Party Bookshelf.
Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in
Unicode and Non-English Environments
This section describes the different settings for Informatica servers and databases
when deploying the Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode and non-English
environments. When you configure Informatica, the Informatica repository, and the
databases, you will need to refer to this section.
The Siebel Data Warehouse can be deployed in various code page environments to
support global deployments. The following (source and target) configurations are
supported:
Unicode to Unicode
Code page (multi- or single-byte) to Unicode
Code page to code page (where the code pages are the same)
Unicode to Unicode Parameter Settings for Siebel Data Warehouse
Unicode requires the code page configuration described in this section.
NOTE: Run the Informatica Server in Unicode mode when the source data supports
multibyte or ISO 8859-1 (8 bit ASCII) code pages or when the source and target
database is Unicode. If not using a Unicode database, select the ASCII option.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 41
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode and Non-English Environments
Table 7 shows the DBMS settings for Unicode to Unicode environments.
Table 7. Unicode to Unicode Settings
Parameters Oracle IBM DB2 UDB
Source DB code page. UTF8 or AL32UTF8. UCS-2.
Source DB connection. In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational, set
to UTF-8.
In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational, set
to UTF-8.
Target DB (Informatica
repository and DAC
repository code page.
UTF8 or AL32UTF8. UCS-2.
Target DB Connection
code page.
In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational, set
to UTF-8.
In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational, set
to UTF-8.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode and Non-English Environments
42 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Code Page (Multibyte/Single-Byte) to Unicode Parameter Settings for
Siebel Data Warehouse
For installation on multibyte code page environments, the data warehouse setup
requires two operating system environments: one for the Informatica Repository
Server and one for the Informatica Server.
Informatica Server,
Informatica Repository
Server, Informatica
client, DAC server, and
DAC client code page.
Any OS.
Set the NLS_LANG to
x_x.AL32UTF8. (For
information about
determining the NLS_LANG,
see Siebel Data Warehouse
Unicode and Code Page
Procedures on page 45.)
If the Informatica Server is on
UNIX, set
PM_CODEPAGENAME
appropriately (for example,
MS932 if server code page is
Japanese) and set the
Informatica Server code page
in Workflow Manager
appropriately (for example,
MS Windows Japanese,
superset of Shift- JIS).
Any OS.
Set DBCODEPAGE to 1208.
If the Informatica Server is on
UNIX, set
PM_CODEPAGENAME
appropriately (for example,
MS932 if server code page is
Japanese) and set the
Informatica Server code page
in Workflow Manager
appropriately (for example, MS
Windows Japanese, superset of
Shift- JIS).
Informatica Server
(Unicode settings).
Set SIEBELUNICODEDB
appropriately. (For more
information, see Siebel Data
Warehouse Unicode and Code
Page Procedures on page 45.)
Set the Data Movement mode
to Unicode.
Set SIEBELUNICODEDB
appropriately. (For more
information, see Siebel Data
Warehouse Unicode and Code
Page Procedures on page 45.)
Set the Data Movement mode
to Unicode.
Table 7. Unicode to Unicode Settings
Parameters Oracle IBM DB2 UDB
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 43
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode and Non-English Environments
Table 8 shows the DBMS settings for an environment with a Japanese source
database and a Unicode target Siebel Data Warehouse.
Table 8. Japanese Code Page to Unicode Settings (Multibyte)
Parameters Oracle IBM DB2 UDB
Source DB code page. JA16SJIS. 943.
Source DB connection
code page.
In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational, set
to MS Windows Japanese,
super set of shift JIS.
In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational,
set to MS Windows Japanese,
super set of shift JIS.
Target DB (Informatica
repository and DAC
repository) code page.
UTF8 or AL32UTF8. UCS-2.
Target DB connection
code page.
In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational, set
to MS Windows Japanese,
superset of Shift-JIS.
In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational,
set to MS Windows Japanese,
superset of Shift-JIS.
Informatica Server code
page and environment
variable settings.
Japanese OS.
It is recommended that you
explicitly set the NLS_LANG
to
JAPANESE_JAPAN.JA16SJIS.
(For information about
determining the NLS_LANG,
see Siebel Data Warehouse
Unicode and Code Page
Procedures on page 45.)
If the Informatica Server is on
UNIX, set
PM_CODEPAGENAME to
MS932 and set the Informatica
Server code page in Workflow
Manager to MS Windows
Japanese, superset of Shift-
JIS.
Japanese OS.
It is recommended that you
explicitly set the
DB2CODEPAGE to 943.
If the Informatica Server is on
UNIX, set
PM_CODEPAGENAME to
MS932 and set the
Informatica Server code page
in Workflow Manager to MS
Windows Japanese, superset
of Shift- JIS.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode and Non-English Environments
44 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Code Page (Multibyte/Single-Byte) to Code Page (Multibyte/Single-Byte)
Parameter Settings for Siebel Data Warehouse
Table 9 shows the DBMS settings for an environment with a Japanese source
database and a Japanese target Siebel Data Warehouse.
Informatica Server
(Unicode settings).
Do not set the parameter
SIEBELUNICODEDB. Set the
Data Movement mode to
Unicode.
Do not set the parameter
SIEBELUNICODEDB. Set the
Data Movement mode to
Unicode.
Informatica Repository
Server, Informatica
client, DAC server, and
DAC client code page and
environment variable
settings.
Japanese OS.
Set the NLS_LANG to
JAPANESE_JAPAN.AL32UTF.
(For information about
determining the NLS_LANG,
see Siebel Data Warehouse
Unicode and Code Page
Procedures on page 45.)
If the Informatica Repository
Server is on UNIX, set
PM_CODEPAGENAME to
MS932.
Japanese OS.
Set DBCODEPAGE to 1208.
If the Informatica Server is on
UNIX, set
PM_CODEPAGENAME to
MS932.
Table 8. Japanese Code Page to Unicode Settings (Multibyte)
Parameters Oracle IBM DB2 UDB
Table 9. Japanese Code Page to Code Page Settings (Multibyte)
Parameters Oracle IBM DB2 UDB
Source DB code page. JA16SJIS. 943.
Source DB connection
code page.
In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational, set
to MS Windows Japanese,
super set of shift JIS.
In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational,
set to MS Windows Japanese,
super set of shift JIS.
Target DB (Informatica
repository and DAC
repository) code page.
JA16SJIS. 943.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 45
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode and Non-English Environments
Siebel Data Warehouse Unicode and Code Page Procedures
This section provides the following procedures related to configuring Unicode and
code pages.
To determine the NLS_LANG value on page 46
To determine the DB2CODEPAGE on page 46
To set SiebelUnicodeDB for Windows on page 46
Target DB connection
code page.
In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational, set
to MS Windows Japanese,
superset of Shift-JIS.
In Workflow Manager >
Connections > Relational,
set to MS Windows Japanese,
superset of Shift-JIS.
Informatica Server,
Informatica Repository
Server, Informatica
client, DAC server, DAC
client code page and
environment variable
settings.
Japanese OS.
It is recommended that you
explicitly set the NLS_LANG
to
JAPANESE_JAPAN.JA16SJIS.
(For information about
determining the NLS_LANG,
see Siebel Data Warehouse
Unicode and Code Page
Procedures on page 45.)
If the Informatica Server is on
UNIX, set
PM_CODEPAGENAME to
MS932 and set the Informatica
Server code page in Workflow
Manager to MS Windows
Japanese (superset of Shift-
JIS).
Japanese OS.
It is recommended that you
explicitly set the
DB2CODEPAGE to 943.
If the Informatica Server is on
UNIX, set
PM_CODEPAGENAME to
MS932 and set the
Informatica Server code page
in Workflow Manager to MS
Windows Japanese (superset
of Shift- JIS).
Informatica Server
(Unicode settings).
Do not set the parameter
SIEBELUNICODEDB. Set the
Data Movement mode to
Unicode.
Do not set the parameter
SIEBELUNICODEDB. Set the
Data Movement mode to
Unicode.
Table 9. Japanese Code Page to Code Page Settings (Multibyte)
Parameters Oracle IBM DB2 UDB
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode and Non-English Environments
46 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
To set NLS_LANG value on Windows on page 47
To set the NLS_LANG value on UNIX on page 47
To set SiebelUnicodeDB on Informatica Server if source and target databases
are Unicode on UNIX on page 48
To determine the NLS_LANG value
For Oracle databases:
In the data warehouse database, run the command
SELECT * FROM V$NLS_PARAMETERS
Mark the NLS_LANG
[NLS_LANGUAGE]_[NLS_TERRITORY].[NLS_CHARACTERSET].
For example:
American_America.UTF8
To determine the DB2CODEPAGE
In the data warehouse database, run the command
SELECT CODEPAGE FROM SYSCAT.DATATYPES
WHERE TYPENAME = VARCHAR
Example result: 1208
To set SiebelUnicodeDB for Windows
1 Navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SYSTEM > CurrentControlSet >
Services > PowerMart > Parameters > MiscInfo.
2 On the right window panel, right-click and select New > String Value.
3 Rename the new string value SiebelUnicodeDB.
4 Double-click SiebelUnicodeDB.
5 In the Value data field, enter your [user_OLTP]@[connectString_OLTP]
[user_OLAP]@[ConnectString_OLAP].
For example, siebel@db204007 siebel@db204008.
For Oracle and DB2, leave a space between siebel@db204007 and
siebel@db204008.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 47
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode and Non-English Environments
For MSSQL, use system DNS name for [connectString_OLTP] and
[connectString_OLAP].
NOTE: You must enter the user names and connect strings in the same case as you
used in the Workflow Manager > Connections > Relational settings.
To set NLS_LANG value on Windows
1 Navigate to Control Panel > System and click the Advanced tab. Click
Environment Variables.
2 In System variables section, click New.
3 Create the system variable name.
For Oracle databases:
In the Variable Name field, enter NLS_LANG.
In the Variable Value field, enter x_x.UTF8.
where x_x is the character set.
For example: American_America.UTF8.
For DB2 databases:
In Variable Name field, enter DB2CODEPAGE.
In Variable Value field, enter 1208.
4 Click OK to close.
5 Reboot the machine after creating the variables.
To set the NLS_LANG value on UNIX
1 Determine the NLS_LANG value.
2 Enter the following at the prompt:
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing Siebel Data Warehouse-Related Software on Windows
48 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
setenv NLS_LANG <NLS_LANG value>
For example: setenv NLS_LANG American_America.UTF8.
CAUTION: Do not put these setenv commands in the .cshrc file. Other machines and
usernames also use this file, and this command will corrupt their non-Unicode
environments.
To set SiebelUnicodeDB on Informatica Server if source and target databases are
Unicode on UNIX
For all UNIX platforms, if both the transactional and data warehouse data
sources are Unicode, add the following line in /export/home/informatica/pm/
pmserver.cfg file.
SiebelUnicodeDB=<OLTP_TBO>@<OLTP_connectionString>
<OLAP_TBO>@<OLAP_ConnectionString>
For example:
SiebelUnicodeDB=ora16221@sdcdl580i016_qa16b
ora16222@sdcdl580i016_qa16b (Refer to instructions)
Installing Siebel Data Warehouse-Related Software on
Windows
This section includes the following topics:
Installing Siebel Analytics (Data Warehouse Option) on Windows on page 49
Installing the Informatica Server and Repository Server on Windows on
page 50
Installing Informatica Client Software on Windows on page 52
Siebel Data Warehouse Data Code Pages Validation on page 53
Installing Java SDK and Drivers on page 53
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 49
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing Siebel Data Warehouse-Related Software on Windows
Installing Siebel Analytics (Data Warehouse Option) on Windows
NOTE: Only the Siebel Data Warehouse installation-specific screens are described in
this book. For a description of the other Siebel Analytics installation screens, see
Siebel Analytics Installation and Configuration Guide.
To install the Siebel Data Warehouse on Windows
1 Access the installation files on the installation CD-ROM, and then run the
program setup.exe.
2 In the Siebel Analytics Installer screen, accept the terms of the license
agreement, and then click Next.
3 Browse for and select the license file.
4 Accept the default installation directory, or browse for and select an alternative
directory.
5 Select the Data Warehouse installation option.
6 Select the language in which error messages are presented.
7 Select the following Data Warehouse components to be installed:
Console Server
Console Client
Console Client Utilities
NOTE: You only need to install the utilities on machines where the Informatica
Server is installed. If you are using a machine only to run the DAC client or
server, you do not need to install the utilities on it.
8 An alert dialog box informs you that the DAC requires Java SDK 1.4.1 or greater.
Click OK.
9 Read the summary information about which features will be installed, and then
click Next.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing Siebel Data Warehouse-Related Software on Windows
50 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
10 When the installation is completed, click Next.
11 Choose to restart your computer now or at a later time, and click Finish.
Installing the Informatica Server and Repository Server on Windows
This section describes installation of the Informatica Server and Repository Server.
To install the Informatica Server on Windows
1 In the Informatica Platform Products SetupUser Information page, enter your
registration information and click Next.
2 In the Informatica Platform Products SetupSelect Components page check
boxes, select PowerMart 6 OEM for Siebel and Server.
3 Click through the Welcome screen.
4 In the Edit Service Account page, enter the Domain, User, and Password for the
Informatica Server service.
5 In the Choose Destination Location page, accept the default location or specify
the location.
6 In the Informatica Server Setup Application - Options page, select Configure
Informatica Service, and then click Continue.
7 In the Keys tab of the Configure Informatica Service dialog box, enter the
Platform Key and the appropriate database server key.
8 In the Server tab, enter the following:
The values in the remaining fields should be the default values.
Field Enter
Server Name A logical name for the Informatica Server. It is recommended that you
enter SIEBEL_DW_SERVER.
TCP/IP Host
Address
The IP address or name of the machine on which you plan to run the
Informatica Server.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 51
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing Siebel Data Warehouse-Related Software on Windows
9 In the Repository tab, enter the following:
10 In the Configuration tab, select the ASCII or UNICODE option and leave the
default values in the remaining fields.
If you select the UNICODE option, remove the check from the Validate Data
Codepages check box, and check the Output Session Log in UTF8 check box.
11 In the Compatibility and Database tab and the JavaSdk tab, leave the default
values in all fields.
12 Click OK in the Configure Informatica Service dialog box to complete the
configuration of the Informatica Server service.
13 In the Informatica Server Setup Application - Options dialog box, click Exit.
To install the Informatica Repository Server on Windows
1 In the Informatica Platform Products SetupUser Information page, enter your
registration information.
2 In the Informatica Platform Products SetupSelect Components page check
boxes, select Informatica Repository Server.
3 Click through the Welcome screen.
Field Enter
Repository
Name
SIEBEL_DW_REP
Repository
User
Administrator
Repository
Password
Administrator
Repository
Server Host
Name
The host machine name where the Informatica Repository Server is
installed.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing Siebel Data Warehouse-Related Software on Windows
52 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
4 In the Edit Service Account screen, enter the machine login information:
5 In the Choose Destination Location window, browse for and select the
Repository Server destination folder. Click Next.
6 Click Next to proceed with the installation.
7 When the installation is complete, click Next again.
8 In the Configure Repository Server screen, enter the Server Port Number and
Administrator Password. Click OK.
NOTE: The Server Port Number default is 5001.
9 In the Setup Complete window, click Finish.
Installing Informatica Client Software on Windows
This section describes installation of the Informatica client, which is used to build
and administer the Siebel Data Warehouse.
Informatica Designer configures and updates the Siebel Data Warehouse
mappings, transformations, and metadata.
Informatica Repository Manager restores and manages the Siebel Data
Warehouse repository.
Informatica Workflow Manager executes the workflows.
Workflow Monitor monitors the status of workflows and sessions.
Field Enter
Domain Local machine or domain name of the user who has Administrator
privileges
User The Windows login user
Password Password for this user
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 53
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing Siebel Data Warehouse-Related Software on Windows
To install PowerMart Client
1 In the Informatica Platform Products SetupUser Information page, enter your
registration information and click Next.
2 In the Informatica Platform Products SetupSelect Components page check
boxes, select PowerMart 6 OEM for Siebel and Client.
3 Click through the Welcome and License Agreement screens.
4 In the Destination Location screen, accept the default location or specify
another.
5 Click through the Select Program Folder screen.
6 In the Select Components screen, select Program and Configuration Files.
7 In the Setup Complete screen, click Finish.
Siebel Data Warehouse Data Code Pages Validation
After installing the Informatica Server, Repository Server, and client tools, add the
following section to the powermart.ini file located in the Informatica Client
directory:
[Code Pages]
ValidateDataCodePages=No
Installing Java SDK and Drivers
This section provides instructions for installing the Java SDK and the JDBC drivers.
NOTE: The DAC client requires the SDK for the Java 2 Platform, Standard Edition,
Version 1.4.1.
To install Java SDK 1.4.1 or above
Download the Java SDK from the Sun Web site, and install it using a directory
path with no spaces, such as D:\j2sdk141
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up the DAC Client
54 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
To install JDBC drivers
Oracle. If you are using an Oracle database (other than 8.x), find the directory
where Oracle is installed. Copy the file named ojdbc14.jar and paste it in the
DAC\lib directory.
If you are using Oracle 8.x, copy the file named classes12.zip and paste it
in the DAC\lib directory. Also, edit the ORACLELIB setting in the
config.bat file as follows:
set ORACLELIB=%DAC_HOME%\lib\classes12.zip
DB2. If you are using a DB2 database, find the directory where DB2 is
installed. In the Java subdirectory copy the file named db2java.zip and paste
it in the DAC\lib directory.
NOTE: If your source or target database is DB2-UDB, you also need to create
Siebel stored procedures to be used during the ETL process.
MSSQL. If you are using an MSSQL database, download the SQL Server JDBC
drivers from Microsofts Web site. Copy the files msbase.jar, mssqlserver.jar,
and msutil.jar to the DAC\lib directory.
Setting Up the DAC Client
This section includes the following topics:
Creating ODBC Database Connections on page 55
Creating the SSE Role on page 56
Configuring the DAC Config.bat File on page 56
Starting the DAC Client and Importing Seed Data on page 56
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 55
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up the DAC Client
Creating ODBC Database Connections
The Informatica Server and Repository Server require native connections to the
Siebel Data Warehouse and OLTP database. The Informatica client needs both an
ODBC connection and a native connection to the Siebel Data Warehouse and OLTP
database.
NOTE: If the Informatica Server is installed in MSSQL in non-ASCII mode, it will need
an ODBC connection to the Siebel Data Warehouse and OLTP database.
To create database connections for DB2 installations
1 Using DB2 Client Configuration Assistant, create a database connection to the
Siebel Data Warehouse, the Siebel OLTP, and the Informatica repository.
2 In the ODBC control panel, System DSN tab, create an ODBC connection to the
Siebel Data Warehouse and OLTP using an ODBC driver.
3 Test the connections to make sure they work.
To create database connections for Oracle installations
1 Using Net8 Assistant or Oracle Net Service, create a native connect string (net
service name) to the Siebel Data Warehouse, the OLTP, and the Informatica
repository.
2 In the ODBC control panel, System DSN tab, create an ODBC connection to the
Siebel Data Warehouse using the Siebel Merant ODBC driver that is supplied
with Siebel Enterprise Server.
3 In the ODBC control panel, System DSN tab, create an ODBC connection to the
Siebel Data Warehouse and OLTP using the Informatica-supplied Merant Closed
driver. This ODBC driver was installed during the Informatica client installation
(the exact name depends on the specific release of Informatica being used).
4 Test the connections to make sure they work.
To create database connections for SQL Server installations
1 Create a database connection to the Siebel Data Warehouse, the Siebel
transactional database, and the Siebel Data Warehouse repository.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up the DAC Client
56 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
2 In the ODBC control panel, System DSN tab, create an ODBC connection to the
Siebel Data Warehouse and OLTP using a SQL Server ODBC driver.
3 Test the connections to make sure they work.
Creating the SSE Role
Use this procedure to create the SSE Role.
To create the SSE Role
Create a database role named SSE_ROLE and make sure this role is granted the
same privileges as the SSE_ROLE on the Siebel OLTP.
Configuring the DAC Config.bat File
To configure the DAC
1 In the DAC directory, find and open the config.bat file.
2 Edit the JAVA_HOME variable to point to the directory where you installed the
Java SDK.
Make sure there are no spaces in the path reference.
3 Edit the DAC_HOME variable to point to the directory where you installed the
DAC.
For example, your entries should look similar to the following:
set JAVA_HOME=d:\j2sdk1.4.1
set DAC_HOME=d:\SiebelAnalytics\DAC
Starting the DAC Client and Importing Seed Data
The DAC client can connect to multiple DAC repositories but only one at a time. This
procedure provides instructions for connecting to a repository for the first time. It
guides you through creating a repository connection and importing seed data.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 57
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up the DAC Client
To start the DAC Client
1 Launch the DAC client by double-clicking the startclient.bat file in the DAC
directory or by running startclient from a command prompt.
2 In the Login... dialog box, select Configure.
3 In the Configuring... dialog box, select Create Connection, and then click Next.
4 Enter the appropriate connection details.
5 Test the connection to make sure it works.
If the DAC repository schema does not exist in the database to which you are
connecting, the schema will be automatically created. When a repository is
created on Oracle or DB2 databases, you have the option of specifying a
tablespace.
6 (Optional for Oracle or DB2 databases) Specify a tablespace.
7 Click Yes to have the repository created automatically.
NOTE: The DAC repository is not supported on DB2-390 databases. If your source or
target database is DB2-390, you need to use a DB2-UDB, MSSQL, or Oracle database
for both the DAC repository and the Informatica repository.
8 Import seed data.
a From the DAC menu bar, choose Tools > DAC Repository
Management > Import.
b Select the appropriate import option, and click OK.
NOTE: If your source or target database is a DB2-390 database, run
DAC_DB2390_Source.sql or DAC_DB2390_Target.sql immediately after importing
the seed data by connecting to the database where the DAC repository resides.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Using the DACs Data Warehouse Configurator Wizard
58 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Using the DACs Data Warehouse Configurator Wizard
Complete the procedures in this section in the order in which they appear.
Use the Data Warehouse Configurator Wizard to complete the following procedures:
Creating the Informatica Repository (in the DAC) on page 58
Dropping the Informatica Repository on page 60
Configuring the Informatica Repository (in DACs Data Warehouse
Configurator) on page 61
Creating Data Warehouse Tables on page 63
Dropping Data Warehouse Tables on page 64
Creating Delete Triggers on page 65
Use the Informatica Repository Server Administration Console to complete the
following procedure:
Configuring the Informatica Repository (in Repository Server Administration
Console) on page 59
Creating the Informatica Repository (in the DAC)
To create the Informatica repository
1 From the DAC menu bar, click Tools > ETL Management > Configure.
2 Select the Create Informatica Repository check box.
The Informatica Repository tab is active.
3 Enter the following information:
Field Description
Database Type Type of database.
Table Owner Valid database user.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 59
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Using the DACs Data Warehouse Configurator Wizard
Configuring the Informatica Repository (in Repository Server
Administration Console)
Before configuring the Informatica Repository, do the following:
Create the ODBC connection for the Siebel Data Warehouse.
If you are using a SQL Server database, create an ODBC connection for the
Siebel transactional database (OLTP). This is required if the SQL Server is
Unicode.
Database
Connection String
If you are using...
Oracle (OCI8) use the tnsnames entry.
Oracle (Thin) use instance name.
SQL server use the database name.
DB2-UDB/DB2-390 use the connect string as defined in the
DB2 configuration.
Host Applicable only to SQL Server. Machine host name where the
server resides.
Database Table
Owner
Name of table owner.
Database Password Password for table owner.
MSSQL Database
Name
Applicable to SQL Server only. The database name where you
want to restore the repository.
Informatica
Administrator
Name/Password
Not applicable while restoring the repository. Used only to
configure the repository.
Repository Server Name of machine hosting the Informatica Repository Server.
Repository Server
Port
Port number used by Informatica Repository Server to listen to
requests.
Email Address Not applicable while restoring the repository. Used only to
configure the repository.
Field Description
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Using the DACs Data Warehouse Configurator Wizard
60 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Make sure the Informatica software has been installed.
To configure the Informatica Repository
1 Start the Informatica Repository Server service.
2 Start the Informatica Repository Server Administration Console.
3 Add a new server. It is recommended that you use the machine name where the
Informatica Repository Server is installed.
4 Connect to the repository. The default password is Administrator.
5 Click Add Repository and add Siebel_DW_Rep to the Cache.
6 Enter the Database Type.
7 Enter the Repository Name as Siebel_DW_Rep.
8 Enter the Connect String Name. If you are using an MSSQL Server database, use
SERVERNAME@DATABASENAME.
9 Enter the Code Page based on the operating system platform.
10 Enter a User and Password, and then click OK to save the information.
11 Select the repository, right-click and start the Informatica Repository Agent.
NOTE: The Informatica repository tables need to be analyzed for better performance.
This procedure must be done manually by the database administrator.
Dropping the Informatica Repository
Use this procedure to drop the Informatica repository.
To drop the Informatica repository
1 From the DAC menu bar, click Tools > ETL Management > Configure.
2 Select the Drop Informatica Repository check box.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 61
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Using the DACs Data Warehouse Configurator Wizard
3 In the Informatica Repository tab, enter the appropriate information, and then
click Start.
Configuring the Informatica Repository (in DACs Data Warehouse
Configurator)
Use this procedure to configure the Informatica repository in the Data Warehouse
Configurator.
To configure the Informatica Repository in the Data Warehouse Configurator
1 From the DAC menu bar, click Tools > ETL Management > Configure.
2 Select the Configure Informatica Repository check box.
3 Select the Informatica Repository tab.
4 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Start.
NOTE: The Informatica repository cannot be configured if the source or target
database is Unicode. Therefore, make sure the Is Unicode check box is not checked
in the Data Warehouse tab and in the Transactional Database tab of the Data
Warehouse Configurator. You then need to configure the Informatica repository in
the Workflow Manager to specify the source and target databases as Unicode. See
To set the database connection code page in Workflow Manager on page 62.
If your source or target database is on SQL Server and you have non-ASCII data, you
must manually create database connections in the Informatica repository and
replace the connections.
To replace database connections for SQL Server databases that have non-ASCII
data
1 Start the Informatica Workflow Manager.
2 Connect to the repository.
3 Select Connections >Relational.
A new window appears.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Using the DACs Data Warehouse Configurator Wizard
62 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
4 Click Add, and then select ODBC.
5 If your source database is on SQL Server, create a connection using the following
values:
6 If your target database is on SQL Server, create a connection using the following
values:
The connections you created appear in the Replace Connections list.
7 Select Connections > Replace.
8 Click Add a New Connection Pair.
9 If your source database is SQL Server, enter MSSQL_OLTP in the From field, and
ODBC_OLTP in the To field.
10 If your target database is SQL Server, click Add a New Connection Pair, and enter
MSSQL_OLAP in the From field, and ODBC_OLAP in the To field.
11 Click Replace.
The database connection code page also has to be set manually through the
Informatica Workflow Manager for Unicode/Non-Latin code pages.
To set the database connection code page in Workflow Manager
1 Start the Informatica WorkFlow Manger.
2 Connect to the repository.
Field Value
Name ODBC_OLTP
Code Page UTF-8 encoding of Unicode
Field Value
Name ODBC_OLAP
Code Page UTF-8 encoding of Unicode
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 63
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Using the DACs Data Warehouse Configurator Wizard
3 Select Connections > Relational.
A new window appears.
4 Select the appropriate OLTP connection (DB2_OLTP for DB2, ORA_OLTP for
Oracle, ODBC_OLTP for MSSQL).
5 For the Code Page, select UTF-8 encoding of Unicode or the appropriate code
page, and click OK.
6 Select the OLAP connection (DB2_OLAP for DB2, ORA_OLAP for Oracle,
ODBC_OLAP for MSSQL).
7 For the Code Page select UTF-8 encoding of Unicode or the appropriate code
page, and click OK.
8 Select the Informatica Repository tab.
9 Enter the appropriate information, and then click Start.
Creating Data Warehouse Tables
Use this procedure to create data warehouse tables. Before you perform this
procedure make sure the SSE role has been created for the Siebel Data Warehouse
and OLTP and that the database user has been associated with the role.
NOTE: Additional work by the database administrator is required if the data
warehouse tables need to be moved to different table spaces (for performance or
manageability).
To create data warehouse tables
1 From the DAC menu bar, click Tools > ETL Management Configure.
2 Select the Create Siebel Data Warehouse Tables check box.
The Data Warehouse tab is active.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Using the DACs Data Warehouse Configurator Wizard
64 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
3 Enter the following information:
Dropping Data Warehouse Tables
Use this procedure to drop data warehouse tables.
To drop data warehouse tables
1 From the DAC menu bar, click Tools > ETL Management Configure.
2 Select the Drop Existing Siebel Data Warehouse Tables check box.
The Data Warehouse tab is active.
3 Enter the following information:
Field Description
Database Type Type of database.
Table Owner Valid database user.
Password Valid database user password.
ODBC Data Source Data Source Name (DSN) for the Siebel Data Warehouse.
Data Area Tablespace where Data Warehouse tables are created.
Index Area Tablespace where Data Warehouse indices are created
(applicable only to Oracle and DB2 databases).
Is Unicode Specifies whether the Data Warehouse database is Unicode.
Field Description
Table Owner Valid database user.
Password Valid database user password.
ODBC Data Source Data Source Name (DSN) for the Siebel Data Warehouse.
Note: You must use the Oracle ODBC driver to drop the data
warehouse tables.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 65
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Using the DACs Data Warehouse Configurator Wizard
Creating Delete Triggers
The change capture process in Siebel Data Warehouse uses delete triggers to capture
deleted records. The preconfigured ETL process captures deleted records for tables
W_ORG_D and W_PERSON_D. The source tables for W_ORG_D and
W_PERSON_D are S_ORG_EXT, S_CONTACT, and S_PRSP_CONTACT; these tables
need to have delete triggers created in the Siebel OLTP database in order to track
deleted records.
The change capture mechanism from this release onwards will use delete triggers
to be able to capture deleted rows information. Out-of-the box ETL captures deletes
for W_ORG_D and W_PERSON_D. The source tables for these S_ORG_EXT,
S_CONTACT and S_PRSP_CONTACT need to have delete triggers created to be able
to track deleted records. Such records are identified by setting the ACTIVE_FLG
column to D.
For vertical applications, there are additional source tables that need to have delete
triggers created in the Siebel OLTP database to be able to track deleted records.
These are S_MDF_TXN, S_ASGN_GRP_POSTN, S_ASGN_RULE_ITEM. The
preconfigured ETL process captures deleted records for W_FUND_F and
W_ALIGNMT_DH.
In Siebel Data Warehouse, preconfigured visibility tables are inactivated. If your
organization is going to use any of the visibility-related data warehouse tables, you
need to activate them in the Tables tab of the Design view of the DAC client. If you
activate visibility tables, you should also create delete triggers on the optional
tables.
When creating delete triggers using the Data Warehouse Configurator, you have the
option of including the optional tables for which you want to enable the delete
triggers. You also have the option of having the trigger statements be directly
executed or being written to a file, which can then be executed by database
administrator.
Before creating delete triggers, you need to create the appropriate database
connections. For instructions, see Creating Database Connections on page 80.
To create a delete trigger
1 From the DAC menu bar, click Tools > ETL Management Configure.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Configuring Informatica Server and Workflow Manager
66 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
2 Select the Create Delete Triggers in Transaction Database check box.
The Delete Triggers tab is active.
3 Select Create Triggers.
4 Select the database where the triggers will be created.
5 (Optional) Select the Include optional triggers check box to include optional
tables.
6 Click Start.
Configuring Informatica Server and Workflow Manager
This section covers the following topics:
Configuring the Informatica Service on page 66
Configuring the Informatica Repository Server (in the Repository
Administration Console) on page 67
Verifying the Informatica Server Host Name on page 69
Configuring the Informatica Repository Using Workflow Manager on page 70
Starting the Informatica Service on Windows on page 71
Adding the PATH Environment Variable for the DAC Server on page 72
Configuring Database Parameter Files on page 72
Configuring the Informatica Service
This configuration follows the installation of the Informatica servers.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 67
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Configuring Informatica Server and Workflow Manager
To configure the Informatica Service
1 Navigate to the Configure Informatica Service screen. Make sure the settings
shown in the following table are selected for each tab.
2 In the Informatica Server Setup ApplicationOptions screen, click Exit.
3 In the Setup Complete screen, click Finish.
Configuring the Informatica Repository Server (in the Repository
Administration Console)
After you restore the Informatica repository on the Administrator Workstation, you
need to configure it. Set up and configure the repository connectivity, and then set
up the client to point to the correct Informatica Server machine.
Before you configure the Informatica Repository Server, make sure that the
Informatica Server is not running and the Informatica Repository Server is running.
To start the Informatica Repository Server
Tab Information
Keys Enter the applicable license keys for your installation. When
finished, click OK. (Obtain the license key information from the
license key letter.)
Server Configure SIEBEL_DW_SERVER. In the Load Manger section,
make sure that the maximum number of concurrent sessions is
not greater than 15 and shared memory is not greater than
3000000.
Configuration Specify whether to use ASCII or UNICODE. If you select
UNICODE, clear the Validate Data Codepages check box.
Compatibility
and Database
Make sure that the Database settings section Treat CHAR as CHAR
on read is selected and that the maximum number of connections
is 100.
Repository Enter the repository name (Siebel_DW_Rep), the repository user
and password, the repository server host name, and the repository
server port number (5001). Click OK.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Configuring Informatica Server and Workflow Manager
68 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
In Windows Services, start the Informatica Repository Server.
Check the log file in the Informatica directory to make sure the server is running.
After you have started the Informatica Repository Server, use the PowerMart
Repository Server Administration Console for this configuration procedure.
To configure the Informatica Repository Server
1 Navigate to Start > Programs > Informatica PowerMart 6.1 OEM for Siebel
Client. Click the Repository Server Administration Console to open it.
2 In the main menu, click Action >Add a new Server Registration.
a Enter the host name (the machine that has the repository).
b Accept the default port number 5001.
c Right-click the server name and choose Connect.
d In the Connect to Repository section, Username and Password fields, enter
Administrator.
3 Click on the Repository menu and select Add repository > Siebel_DW_Rep.
4 Right-click Siebel_DW_Rep and select Edit Connection.
a If your repository server is on an English UNIX machine, set the Code Page
to ISO 8859-1 Western European.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 69
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Configuring Informatica Server and Workflow Manager
b To connect to the Siebel Data Warehouse repository, fill in the fields with this
information:
Click OK.
5 Make sure that the Server is running.
a Under Windows, check the Windows Services.
b Under UNIX, check the log file.
Verifying the Informatica Server Host Name
After changing the server host name, verify the name change.
To verify that Informatica Server host name has been changed
1 Right-click SIEBEL_DW_SERVER and select Monitor.
A red triangle appears next to the SIEBEL_DW_SERVER icon.
2 In Workflow Manager, highlight Siebel_DW_Rep. Click Server Configuration
from menu bar and select Database Connections.
The Database Connections window opens. If you selected Configure Informatica
Repository (enter source and target information) from the Siebel Data
Warehouse installation, the Siebel Data Warehouse and Siebel transactional
database should be configured already.
Field Enter
Database Type DB2, Oracle, or MS SQL
Database user OLAP user name
Database password OLAP table password
Connect String OLAP database alias name. The Informatica repository
is usually stored in the data warehouse database folder.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Configuring Informatica Server and Workflow Manager
70 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
3 Highlight OLAP and click Edit. Verify that all information for the target database
is correct. Verify that the Data Source field value is OLAP. Click OK or Cancel.
The target information should be the same as during the Siebel Data Warehouse
installation.
4 Highlight OLTP and click Edit. Verify that all information for the source database
is correct. Verify that the Data Source field value is OLTP. Click OK or Cancel.
The target information should be the same as during the Siebel Data Warehouse
installation.
Configuring the Informatica Repository Using Workflow Manager
Configure the Informatica repository using the following procedure.
To configure the Informatica repository
1 Start the Informatica Workflow Manager.
2 In the Repositories list, select the SIEBEL_DW_REP repository.
3 Pull down the Repository menu and choose Connect.
The Connect to Repository window opens.
4 Log in using the Administrator account (the password is also Administrator).
5 Click Connect.
6 Once connected, select the SIEBEL_DW_Server under the SIEBEL_DW_REP
icon.
7 Pull down the Server Configuration menu and choose Edit Server.
8 In the Host Name field, enter the Computer Name (as shown in the Network
control panel) of the Informatica Server.
9 Optionally, configure the Code Page setting:
If the Informatica Server is on ENU UNIX, pull down the Code Page menu
and choose Western European. For localized environments, as an example, if
the Informatica Server is running on a Japanese machine, choose MS
Windows Japanese, Super Set of Shift JIS.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 71
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Configuring Informatica Server and Workflow Manager
If the Informatica Server uses ENU Windows, leave the setting unchanged.
For localized environments, choose the appropriate setting.
10 Click Advanced. In the Advanced window, check to see if $PMRootDir points to
the directory where the Informatica server is to be installed, as in the following
examples.
For Windows platforms:
C:\Program Files\Informatica\PowerMart Server
For UNIX platforms:
/export/home/informatica/pm
NOTE: If you follow the recommended installation, the Informatica server installs
on the Informatica Server. If you install it on a different directory, make sure to
update the $PMRootDir variable with the new location.
11 Close the Server window.
Some error messages appear in the Messages pane. These are normal because
the Informatica Server is not yet installed.
12 Select Siebel_DW_Server, right-click it, and choose Monitor a process.
A process monitoring window opens. Use this window monitor the Siebel Data
Warehouse loading process.
13 Exit from Informatica PowerMart Workflow Manager.
Starting the Informatica Service on Windows
The following procedure shows how to set up the Informatica service on Windows.
To start the Informatica Service on Windows
1 In the Control Panel, open the Services panel.
2 Select the Informatica service, then double-click it.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Configuring Informatica Server and Workflow Manager
72 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
3 In the Startup Type frame, select Automatic. In the Log On As frame, select
System Account, then click OK.
NOTE: Do not use System Account if you plan on using email notification. Use
This account with the appropriate user name and domain.
4 In the Services control panel, click Start to start the Informatica Service.
NOTE: If the Informatica Repository Manager and Workflow Manager are not
pointing to the Siebel Data Warehouse, the Informatica service cannot start.
5 Close the Services control panel.
Adding the PATH Environment Variable for the DAC Server
To add the PATH environment variable for the DAC server
Add to the PATH environment variable the path for the Informatica Server bin
directory.
Configuring Database Parameter Files
Use these procedures to configure the database parameter files.
Go to the appropriate source database directory in
dwrep\Informatica\ParameterFiles and copy the parameterfileOLTP.txt to the
SrcFiles directory on the Informatica Server machine.
Go the appropriate target database directory in
dwdb\dwrep\Informatica\ParameterFiles and copy the parameterfileDW.txt to
the SrcFiles directory on the Informatica Server machine.
For Siebel Industry Applications, go the appropriate database directory in
dwrep\Informatica\ParameterFiles and copy both parameterfileOLTP.txt and
sia_parameterfileOLTP.txt to the SrcFiles directory on the Informatica Server
machine.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 73
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting DAC ETL Preferences
For Siebel Industry Applications, go the appropriate target database directory in
dwdb\dwrep\Informatica\ParameterFiles and copy both parameterfileDW.txt
and sia_parameterfileDW.txt to the SrcFiles directory on the Informatica Server
machine.
Setting DAC ETL Preferences
There are a number of ETL parameters that you can set using the DACs ETL
Preferences dialog box.
To access the ETL Preferences dialog box
1 Launch the DAC client by double-clicking the startclient.bat file in the DAC
directory or by running startclient from a command prompt.
2 From the DAC menu bar, choose Tools > ETL Management Preferences.
The available parameters are described in Table 10.
Table 10. ETL Preferences
Parameter Description
Analysis Start Date The start date used to build the day dimension and to flatten
exchange rates and costs lists.
Analysis End Date The end date used to build the day dimension and to flatten
exchange rates and costs lists.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting DAC ETL Preferences
74 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Prune Days The LAST_UPD column in Siebel OLTP tables is used for
incremental change capture. This timestamp reflects the actual
event time. It is therefore possible for a data row to be committed
to the OLTP database with a LAST_UPD date that is older than the
date on which the last refresh was executed. This will cause the
data row to be missed in the subsequent extract (if based purely on
LAST_UPD date).
However, the LAST_UPD date column still provides an opportunity
to improve the change capture process by overlapping the
extraction date widow by the number of days set in this parameter.
The records extracted in the overlapped window are filtered by
comparing this information with information in the Image table.
The Prune Days setting ensures that the rows that had values in
LAST_UPD older than values in LAST_REFRESH_DATE are not
missed. This is a parameter that can be set based on experience
with processes, such as remote synch, that potentially can cause
records to be missed. This parameter cannot be less than 1.
For example: Assume the table W_PERSON_D was refreshed on
January 15th by querying the table S_CONTACT. And, the Prune
Days setting was set to 5. The next time S_CONTACT is queried to
load W_PERSON_D, the records that have a LAST_UPD value since
January 10 are compared with the ROW_ID of the Image table to
cover for any missing records between January 15 and January 10
(the overlap period).
Default OLTP
Currency
During the ETL process, if a records transaction currency is null,
the ETL process uses the currency specified here as the default
transaction currency.
DW Currency The currency to which all financial transaction are converted
during the load process.
Default Exchange
Rate
The exchange rate used during a data warehouse currency
conversion if certain currency exchange rates are not available.
Max Days in a Sales
Stage
Applicable to opportunities only. The maximum number of days an
opportunity can spend in a sales stage.
Table 10. ETL Preferences
Parameter Description
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 75
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up DAC System Properties and Resources
Setting Up DAC System Properties and Resources
This section covers the following topics:
Setting Up DAC System Properties on page 76
Registering Informatica Servers on page 79
Creating Database Connections on page 80
Configuring Email Recipients on page 82
Default Language The language to which columns display strings are translated.
Note: Language-independent strings are stored in the _l columns.
If you do not know what the default language setting is, issue the
following query against the OLTP database:
select lang_id from S_LST_OF_VAL
where type=ETL_UNSPEC_STR;
Default DW Index
Space
Applicable to Oracle databases only. The tablespace where indices
are created.
Note: This tablespace is used only when indices are dropped and
created. Once the indices are created, changing the value does not
move them over.
Alignment Version Applicable to vertical applications only. Seed data needs to be
updated in certain lists of values to make sure that the ETL process
correctly populates the alignment type and product category
relationships in the Siebel Data Warehouse.
Remove the check from this check box if you want to make changes
to the existing alignment.
Check this check box if you want to create a new alignment
version.
This setting is used by Siebel Life Sciences to control loading of
changes in assignment rules in Siebel Assignment Manager.
Table 10. ETL Preferences
Parameter Description
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up DAC System Properties and Resources
76 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Setting Up DAC System Properties
The DAC system properties determine the behavior of the DAC server. This section
describes the system properties available in the DAC System Properties tab in the
Setup view of the DAC client.
To access the DAC System Properties tab
1 Launch the DAC client by double-clicking the startclient.bat file in the DAC
directory or by running startclient from a command prompt.
2 Click Setup on the DAC toolbar.
The DAC System Properties tab is active.
Table 11 provides a description of the DAC system properties.
Table 11. DAC System Properties
Property Description
Analyze Frequency (in
days)
For the DAC repository table, the frequency (in days) the DAC
client automatically updates the table and index statistics for the
DAC repository. The value must be numerical.
Analyze Tables For the data warehouse schema tables, indicates whether during
the ETL process the DAC server automatically issues analyze
table statements when a table is truncated and loaded. Possible
values are True and False.
Auto Restart ETL When the DAC server abnormally terminates during the
execution of an ETL, the status remains as Running. The status
of an ETL is updated only by the DAC server.
When this property is set to True, the server automatically
continues running the ETL process. When set to False, the run
statuses are updated to Failed. In this case, the administrator
needs to restart the failed ETL manually.
CreateQueryIndexesAt
TheEnd
During the ETL process, the DAC server automatically drops and
creates indices. When set to True, this property groups all query
type indices and runs them after the ETL is complete. Possible
values are True and False.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 77
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up DAC System Properties and Resources
DAC Server Host Host name or IP address of the machine where the DAC server
resides.
Note: The DAC server and a given DAC repository have a one-to-
one mapping. That is, you can only run one DAC server against
any given DAC repository. Thus, in the repository you must
specify the network host name of the machine where the DAC
sever is to be run.
Note: This property also takes the value localhost. However, this
value is provided for development and testing purposes and
should not be used in a production environment.
DAC Server OS Operating system of the machine where the DAC server resides.
Possible values are Windows, Solaris, or AIX.
Note: If you move the DAC server from another operating system
to AIX, you need to change the DAC server host to the
appropriate value, restart the DAC client, and reenter all the
password fields for the Informatica servers and database
connections, and reconfigure the DAC server on the AIX
machine by running the serverSetupPrompt.sh.
DAC Server Port Network port to which the DAC server binds in order to listen to
client requests. The default value is 3141. If this port has been
assigned to another process, you can enter any numerical port
value greater than 1024.
DropAndCreateIndexes Indicates whether, during the ETL process, the DAC server
automatically drops and creates indices. Possible values are True
and False.
Dryrun Indicates whether tasks are executed without invoking
Informatica workflows. The following processes are executed:
change capture, truncation of tables, drop and creation of
indices, and analyze statements. Possible values are True and
False.
Note: This option should be used for debugging purposes only
and not used in a production environment.
Generic Task
Concurrency Limit
Determines how many tasks with execution types other than
Informatica can be run concurrently. The value must be
numerical.
Table 11. DAC System Properties
Property Description
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up DAC System Properties and Resources
78 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
HeartBeatInterval Frequency (in seconds) the DAC server checks on the health of
the database connections. The value must be numerical. For
example, a value of 300 (the default value) indicates the system
will perform subsystem diagnostics and recovery procedures
every 300 seconds.
Output Redirect Indicates whether logging information and standard output and
errors are redirected to files in the log directory (when property
is set to True). The file containing standard output starts with
out_ and ends with the .log extension. The standard error
messages are in the file starting with err_ and ending with the
.log extension.
If this property is set to False, the logging information is directed
to the machines standard output and error files, which typically
defaults to the console from which the DAC server was launched
if the server was launched in a visible console mode. If the
server is launched as a Windows service, the logging
information is directed to the service log. If the server is
launched with the command shell not visible, all logging
information is deleted.
Repository DB Pool
Size
Maximum number of connections to the DAC repository the DAC
server will maintain. The value must be numerical.
Note: As the DAC server runs it needs to perform transactions
and queries on the DAC repository. In order for it to do so
efficiently, it internally maintains a pool of preexisting database
connections. This reduces latency and leads to better use of
resources through connection sharing. However, for this to
happen, you need to specify the maximum size of the
connection pool. This setting should be determined in
consultation with the database administrator of the database
where the DAC repository resides.
Scheduler.Poll.Interval Frequency (in seconds) the DAC server polls for changes in the
schedule configuration.
Table 11. DAC System Properties
Property Description
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 79
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up DAC System Properties and Resources
Registering Informatica Servers
This section describes registering the Informatica servers in the DAC and specifying
the number of workflows that can be executed in parallel. The DAC server
automatically load balances across the severs and does not run more than the value
specified for each of them. You can perform these tasks in the Informatica Servers
tab in the Setup View of the DAC client.
You need to register at least one Informatica server. You should register one
Informatica server for each Informatica repository.
Script Before Every
ETL
The name of the script or executable to be run before every
execution plan.
For example, before running an execution plan, you might want
to run a process or perform certain tasks. These can be
contained in a script or executable. This file should be placed in
the scripts subdirectory of the DAC server.
The execution plan runs only after the external process has
finished. Therefore, it is important that the script or executable
does not fail.
Script After Every ETL The name of the script or executable to be run after every
execution plan.
For more information, see the description of the property Script
Before Every ETL.
Server Log Level Output logging level. Possible values are Finest, Finer, Fine,
Config, Info, Warning, and Severe. The Severe value produces
minimal log details, and Finest produces the most extensive
amount of reporting.
SQL Trace Indicates whether the SQL statements to the DAC repository and
database connections are added to the log file. Possible values
are True and False. The True value hints the database
connectivity layer of the DAC server to enable SQL tracing; thus,
every SQL statement that is run by the DAC server is spooled to
the appropriate output log file.
It is recommended that you set this property to False.
Table 11. DAC System Properties
Property Description
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up DAC System Properties and Resources
80 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
The DAC server uses pmcmd to run the Informatica workflows on the Informatica
servers. Make sure the path to the directory in which the Informatica server is
installed is added to the DAC server system properties.
NOTE: It is recommended that the Informatica Server be installed on the machine
where the DAC server is installed. If a machine is running only the DAC client, it
does not need an Informatica server installed.
To access the Informatica Servers tab
1 Launch the DAC client by double-clicking the startclient.bat file in the DAC
directory or by running startclient from a command prompt.
2 Click Setup on the DAC toolbar, and then click the Informatica Servers tab.
Table 12 provides a description of the Informatica server properties.
Creating Database Connections
You can set up database connections in the Database Connections tab in the Setup
View of the DAC client.
Table 12. Informatica Server Properties
Property Description
Name Logical name for the Informatica server.
Server Host Name Informatica server host name or IP address.
Port Port where the Informatica server connects for requests. (The
default port number is 4001).
Login Informatica user name who has appropriate privileges to
execute workflows.
Password Informatica user password.
Maximum Sessions Maximum number of workflows that can be executed on the
server. If the number of sessions is 0 or is not specified, the DAC
server assigns the default value of 5.
Inactive Indicates whether the Informatica server is active or inactive.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 81
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up DAC System Properties and Resources
To access the Database Connections tab
1 Launch the DAC client by double-clicking the startclient.bat file in the DAC
directory or by running startclient from a command prompt.
2 Click Setup on the DAC toolbar, and then click the Database Connections tab.
Table 13 provides a description of the database connection properties.
Table 13. Database Connection Properties
Property Description
Name Logical name for the connection. (The metadata that comes with
Siebel Analytics Data Warehouse has two data sources: OLTP,
which points to the Siebel Transaction Database, and the Data
Warehouse.)
Type Source or Warehouse.
Connection Type Type of database connection. Possible values are the following:
Oracle (OCI8). Connect to Oracle using the tnsnames
entry.
Oracle (Thin). Connect to Oracle using thin driver.
DB2. DB@ UDB database.
DB2-390. DB2 390 database.
MSSQL. Microsoft SQL Server.
Connection String If you are using...
Oracle (OCI8) use the tnsnames entry.
Oracle (Thin) use instance name.
SQL server use the database name.
DB2-UDB/DB2-390 use the connect string as defined in the DB2
configuration.
Table Owner Name of table owner.
Password Password for table owner.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up DAC System Properties and Resources
82 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Configuring Email Recipients
You can set up email recipients in the Email Recipients tab in the Setup View of the
DAC client.
To access the Email Recipients tab
1 Launch the DAC client by double-clicking the startclient.bat file in the DAC
directory or by running startclient from a command prompt.
2 Click Setup on the DAC toolbar, and then click the Email Recipients tab.
Table 14 provides a description of the email recipient properties.
DBHost Host machine where the database resides. This field is mandatory
if you are using Oracle (Thin) or MSSQL but is not required if you
are using Oracle (OCI8), DB2, or DB2-390.
Port Port where the database receives requests. Required for Oracle
(Thin) and MSSQL databases. Not required for Oracle (OCI8), DB2,
or DB2-390 databases.
Table 13. Database Connection Properties
Property Description
Table 14. Email Recipient Properties
Property Description
Name Logical name of the user to be notified.
Email Address Email address where the notification is sent.
Notification Level The notification levels are as follows:
10 -- Notifies recipient of success or failure of each task.
5 -- Notifies recipient of success of failure of the entire ETL
process.
1 -- Notifies recipient that ETL completed successfully.
Inactive Indicates whether the record is active or inactive.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 83
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Setting Up the DAC Server
Setting Up the DAC Server
This section provides the procedure for configuring the connection between the
DAC server and the DAC repository and for setting up email recipients. You must
perform this task on the machine hosting the DAC server. There should be one
installation of the DAC server for each DAC repository. The repository configuration
is mandatory. Setting up email recipients is optional.
The DAC server has a built-in login-authentication based email (SMTP) client, so it
talks to any SMTP login-authenticating server to send emails. The DAC server
notifies email recipients about the status of various on-going activities, such as the
status of an ETL execution.
NOTE: On machines in which you must use Telnet, such as UNIX servers, you can
also invoke the serverSetup script. This option leads you into setting up the server
bootup properties and also the email account configuration.
To configure the DAC repository connection and email recipients
1 Launch the DAC client by double-clicking the startclient.bat file in the DAC
directory or by running startclient from a command prompt.
2 From the menu bar, click Tools > DAC Server Management DAC Server Setup.
A confirmation dialog box asks you to confirm that you want to configure the
DAC repository connection.
3 Click Yes.
The Server Configuration dialog box appears.
4 In the Repository Configuration tab, enter the appropriate information.
5 Click Test Connection to make sure the connection works.
6 In the Email Configuration, enter the appropriate information, and click Save.
Once the configuration has been completed, you can start the DAC server by double-
clicking on the startserver.bat file in the DAC directory or by running the
startserver.bat from a command window.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX
84 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on
UNIX
This section provides instructions for installing and configuring the Informatica
software in the UNIX environment. For instructions on installing the Siebel Data
Warehouse software on UNIX, see Siebel Analytics Installation and Configuration
Guide.
The following topics are included:
Setting Up Environment Parameters on UNIX (Prerequisite) on page 84
Installing Informatica Software on UNIX on page 84
Setting the Environment Variables for Informatica Server on UNIX on page 90
Configuring Informatica Repository from Informatica Workflow Manager on
UNIX on page 91
Configuring the DAC Client and Server on Solaris and AIX on page 92
Starting the Informatica Repository Server on UNIX on page 93
Starting and Stopping the Informatica Server on UNIX on page 93
Setting Up Environment Parameters on UNIX (Prerequisite)
If you are using a non-ENU operating system, you must set the environment
parameter PM_CODEPAGENAME appropriately. For example, if the Informatica
repository has been restored from a machine running a Japanese operating system,
set the PM_CODEPAGENAME environment variable to MS392. For more
information, see Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode
and Non-English Environments on page 40.
Installing Informatica Software on UNIX
This section provides instructions for installing the required Informatica software
on UNIX.
If you are using a non-ENU operating system, make sure you have all the required
locale files installed.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 85
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX
Install the Informatica software directly from the CD-ROM.
NOTE: If you cannot install the software directly from the CD-ROM, you must use
FTP in binary mode; otherwise, the installation will fail.
After the FTP process, the permission setting for all install files must be changed.
The example below shows the install prompts as well as the values that should be
entered.
To change the permission setting for the install files
Enter the following:
chmod 777 *
a0repser.icf imr.idm pc.icf pmlocale.idm repomisc.idm
extproc.idm instalja.msg pmdoc.idm pmmisc.idm reposhr.idm
icipc install pmeval pmserver.idm reposql.idm
icipc_pd install.msg pmexes.idm repoexes.idm rw.idm
icirepo lictxt.txt pmlibs.idm repolibs.idm x0imr.icf
The installation process gets kicked off by running the following from the install
directory:
./install
===================================================
Welcome to Informatica Installation Wizard.
All Informatica products Copyright 1996-2003.
===================================================
Please enter your Product Key for Informatica Platform Products:
EBLO-AFIF-YAZB-YGYJ-MVSM
The Infrastructure Products may be licensed solely for use with
the Siebel Marketing Transaction DataBase or DataMart as the
target. Infrastructure Products are licensed for restricted use
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX
86 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
in extracting and loading data but not transforming such data with
the Siebel Marketing DataMart as the source and not necessarily
the target.
If included with the Siebel applications, a single license to the
Infrastructure Products shall be restricted to use on 10 or fewer
CPUs per server through the end of 2006, and thereafter shall be
restricted to use on 14 or fewer CPUs per server. This CPU
restriction shall not apply to customers who have obtained a Full
Use License or an unlimited CPU license to Infrastructure Products
from Siebel or Informatica.
Do you accept the above license (y/n) : y
Installing the Informatica Repository Server
The example below shows the install prompts as well as the values that should be
entered.
===================================================
Welcome to Informatica Installation Wizard.
All Informatica products Copyright 1996-2003.
===================================================
1. Informatica Repository Server 6.2
2. Informatica PowerMart Server 6.2 OEM for Siebel
3. Informatica Metadata Reporter 6.2
0. Exit
Please select a product to install: 1
Installing Informatica Repository Server 6.2
Please specify a directory to install to [/home/qa-sm/qauser7s/
informatica/repositoryserver] : /export/home/informatica/
repositoryserver
/export/home/informatica/repositoryserver does not exist. create
(y/n) : y
Installing module repoexes
Module repoexes extracted successfully.
Installing module repolibs
Module repolibs extracted successfully.
Installing module repomisc
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 87
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX
Module repomisc extracted successfully.
Installing module pmlocale
Module pmlocale extracted successfully.
Installing module rw
Module rw extracted successfully.
Installing module reposql
Module reposql extracted successfully.
Installing module reposhr
Module reposhr extracted successfully.
Installing module pmdoc
Module pmdoc extracted successfully.
Product specific installation is starting...
Informatica(tm) PMREPCONFIG 6.2 (0317)
Copyright (c) Informatica Corporation 1994 - 2003
All Rights Reserved.
Configuration file name [pmrepserver.cfg]:
ServerPort[5001]:
AdminPasswd[]: Administrator
RaMinPort[5002]:
RaMaxPort[65535]:
ConfigDir[Config]:
BackupDir[Backup]:
PluginDir[Plugin]:
ErrorSeverityLevel( E[rror] | W[arning] | I[nfo] | T[race] |
D[ebug] ) [info]:
LogFileName[pmrepserver.log]:
Installation of Informatica Repository Server 6.2 has completed
successfully.
Would you like to view the readme file right now (y/n) : n
Press enter to continue...
Installing the Informatica Server
The example below shows the install prompts as well as the values that should be
entered.
===================================================
Welcome to Informatica Installation Wizard.
All Informatica products Copyright 1996-2003.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX
88 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
===================================================
1. Informatica Repository Server 6.2
2. Informatica PowerMart Server 6.2 OEM for Siebel
3. Informatica Metadata Reporter 6.2
0. Exit
Please select a product to install: 2
Installing Informatica PowerMart Server 6.2 OEM for Siebel
Please specify a directory to install to [/home/qa-sm/qauser7s/
informatica/pc] : /export/home/informatica/pm
/export/home/informatica/pm does not exist. create (y/n) : y
Installing module pmserver
Module pmserver extracted successfully.
Installing module pmmisc
Module pmmisc extracted successfully.
Installing module pmexes
Module pmexes extracted successfully.
Installing module pmlibs
Module pmlibs extracted successfully.
Installing module pmlocale
Module pmlocale extracted successfully.
Installing module rw
Module rw extracted successfully.
Installing module extproc
Module extproc extracted successfully.
Installing module reposhr
Module reposhr extracted successfully.
Installing module pmdoc
Module pmdoc extracted successfully.
Product specific installation is starting...
+----------------------------------------------------+
+ Informatica Server Configuration Utility +
+ Copyright (c) Informatica Corporation 1996-2003 +
+ All Rights Reserved. +
+----------------------------------------------------+
Configuration file name [pmserver.cfg]:
ServerName[None]: SIEBEL_DW_SERVER
RepositoryName[RepositoryName]: Siebel_DW_Rep
PMUser[Administrator]:
PMPassword[*************]: Administrator
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 89
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX
RepServerHo
RepServerPortNumber[5001]:
RepServerTimeout[60]:
LogFileName[pmserver.log]:
DataMovementMode[ASCII]: UNICODE (NOTE: if moving non ascii
data).
ValidateDataCodePages[Yes]: No
SessionLogInUTF8[No]:
MaxSessions[10]: 15
LMSharedMem[2000000]: 3000000
PMCacheDir[.]:
PlatformKey[enter_unix_platform_key]: <Enter the key> example
U26NHGSAU
OracleKey[
SybaseKey[enter_sybase_database_key]:
InformixKey[enter_informix_database_key]:
DB2Key[enter_db2_database_key]: <Enter the key> example Q23ON2TJL
ODBCKey[enter_odbc_database_key]: <Enter the key> example
I17WIHGQX
TeradataKey[enter_teradata_database_key]:
Key[EBLO-AFIF-YAZB-YGYJ-MVSM]:
TimestampWorkflowLogMessages[No]:
ExportSessionLogLibName[]:
ErrorSeverityLevel[info]:
DateHandling40Compatibility[No]:
Pmserver3XCompatability[0]:
AggregateTreatNullAsZero[0]:
AggregateTreatRowAsInsert[0]:
DateDisplayFormat[DY MON DD HH24:MI:SS YYYY]:
TreatNullInComparisonOperatorsAs[Null]:
LoadManagerAllowDebugging[Yes]: No
CreateIndicatorFiles[No]:
XMLWarnDupRows[Yes]: No
OutputMetaDataForFF[No]:
MaxLookupSPDBConnections[0]:
MaxSybaseConnections[100]:
MaxMSSQLConnections[100]:
SybaseIQLocalToPmServer[No]:
NumOfDeadlockRetries[10]:
DeadlockSleep[0]:
JVMDllPath[]:
JVMClassPath[]:
JVMMinMemory[32M]:
JVMMaxMemory[64M]:
TreatDBPartitionAsPassThrough[No]:
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX
90 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Installation of Informatica PowerMart Server 6.2 OEM for Siebel
has completed successfully.
If you would like to configure the Informatica Server again, at the prompt enter:
./pmconfig
Setting the Environment Variables for Informatica Server on UNIX
Add setenv variables to .cshrc. Otherwise, you have to set the environment
variables every time you log into the UNIX machine before configuring, starting, or
stopping the Informatica servers.
For Solaris, in the root directory, add these to command lines to .cshrc:
setenv PATH /export/home/informatica/pm:.:${PATH}
setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH /export/home/informatica/
pm:${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}
setenv PATH /export/home/informatica/
repositoryserver:.:${PATH}
setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH /export/home/informatica/
repositoryserver:${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}
For AIX, in the root directory, add these command lines to .cshrc:
setenv PATH ${PATH}:/export/home/informatica/pc:.
setenv LIBPATH ${LIBPATH}:/export/home/informatica/pc
setenv PATH ${PATH}:/export/home/informatica/
repositoryserver:.
setenv LIBPATH ${LIBPATH}:/export/home/informatica/
repositoryserver
For HP-UX, in the root directory, add these command lines to .cshrc:
setenv PATH /export/home/informatica/pm:.:${PATH}
setenv SHLIB_PATH /export/home/informatica/pm:${SHLIB_PATH}
setenv PATH /export/home/informatica/
repositoryserver:.:${PATH}
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 91
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX
setenv SHLIB_PATH /export/home/informatica/
repositoryserver:${SHLIB_PATH}
Configuring Informatica Repository from Informatica Workflow Manager
on UNIX
Use this procedure to configure the Informatica Repository from the Informatica
Workflow Manager.
To configure the Informatica Repository
1 In Informatica Workflow Manager, right-click SIEBEL_DW_SERVER and select
Edit.
2 In the Host Name (Name or Dotted IP address) field, enter the name of the
machine on which the Informatica Server is running.
3 Enter the name of the UNIX machine on which the Informatica Server is
running.
4 In Code Page field, pick the appropriate code page, and then click OK. The Code
Page for the preconfigured Informatica repository is MS Windows Latin 1
(ANSI), Super Set of Latin 1.
For example, if the informatica server is running on ENU, choose Western
European, or If the Informatica Server is running on a Japanese operating
system, choose MS Windows Japanese, Super Set of Shift JIS.
5 Click Advanced.
The Server Variables section appears.
6 In the $PMRootDir, change the value to that of the path of the PowerMart server
directory.
For example: /export/home/informatica/pm)
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX
92 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Configuring the DAC Client and Server on Solaris and AIX
To configure the DAC client and server on Solaris and AIX, follow the instruction for
configuring the DAC client and server on Windows in Setting Up the DAC Client
on page 54 and Setting Up the DAC Server on page 83 as well as the instructions
in this section.
The appropriate files for Solaris and AIX have .sh extension.
To configure the DAC client and server on Solaris and AIX
1 Make sure that the shell from which the DAC client or server is started has the
database connectivity environment correctly setup if you are using either the
Oracle OCI driver or the DB2 native driver. If you are using the SQL Server driver
or the Oracle Thin driver this step is not necessary.
2 Make sure the information environment is set up correctly.
For csh-shell or its related shell:
If Informatica is installed in the directory /export/home/informatica621,
then on Solaris, the appropriate variables to set are the following:
setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH ${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}:/export/home/
informatica621/pm
setenv PATH ${PATH}:/export/home/informatica621/pm
setenv PM_HOME /export/home/informatica621/pm
On AIX, the appropriate variables to set are the following:
setenv LIBPATH ${LIBPATH}:/export/home/informatica621/pm
setenv PATH ${PATH}:/export/home/informatica621/pm
setenv PM_HOME /export/home/informatica621/pm
If you are using bash-shell or shells with a similar syntax, then change the
entry as follows:
Change:
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 93
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX
setenv PATH ${PATH}/export/home/informatica/pm
To:
export PM_HOME="/export/home/informatica/pm"
NOTE: On Solaris, the recommended JVM is the Sun J2SDK 1.4.1 and on AIX it is
IBM JDK 1.4
3 If you are installing the DAC server on AIX, do the following:
a Launch the DAC client, and navigate to Setup > DAC System Properties.
b Change the value of DAC Server OS to AIX.
c Close the DAC client, and launch it again.
d Navigate to Setup > Informatica Servers and reenter all the password fields.
e Navigate to Setup > Database Connections and reenter all the password
fields.
To run the DAC server
For AIX, use the script named startserver_aix.sh.
For Solaris, use the script named startserver_sun.sh.
Starting the Informatica Repository Server on UNIX
To start the Informatica Repository Server
Go to /export/home/informatica/repositoryserver and enter pmrepserver.
Check the log file to see if the server started. If it started correctly, the log file
will state: Server Initialization Completed.
Starting and Stopping the Informatica Server on UNIX
Use this procedure to start the Informatica Server.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse on UNIX
94 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Prerequisite
From the UNIX machine, make sure you can connect to the OLTP and the data
warehouse database.
The Informatica repository must have been configured using the Informatica
Workflow Manager.
The environment variables for the Informatica Server on UNIX must be set.
The appropriate parameter files should have been copied to the SrcFiles
directory.
For Unicode, the SiebelUnicodeDB must be set. For more information, see
Deploying Informatica and Siebel Data Warehouse in Unicode and Non-English
Environments on page 40.
To start the Informatica Server
Go to /export/home/informatica/pm, and enter pmserver.
Check the log file to see if the server started. If it started correctly, the log file
will state: Server Initialization Completed.
To stop the Informatica Server
Enter
./pmcmd stopserver <repository username> <repository password>
<port #>.
For example:
./pmcmd stopserver Administrator Administrator 4001
You can check whether the Informatica Server is running by entering the
command ps -elf |grep pmserver.
If it lists pmserver process, the server is running. If it lists grep pmserver, that is
the process of the ps command.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 95
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Updating Siebel OLTP Schema Definitions
Updating Siebel OLTP Schema Definitions
Customers upgrading to Siebel Data Warehouse version 7.7 need to update the
schema definitions in the Siebel transactional database (OLTP).
NOTE: This process requires the use of Siebel Tools.
This process consists of
Backing up the repository
Importing the .sif using Siebel Tools
Verifying the application of the .sif
Backing Up the Siebel Repository
Whether or not the SIF file is being applied to a development or to a production
environment, back up the repository before beginning the process. To back up the
repository, use the Siebel utility repimexp to export the repository to a .dat file.
To back up a repository
1 Open a DOS window and navigate to the siebsrvr\bin directory.
2 Run the command siebenv to set the Siebel environment variables.
3 Export the repository to a .dat file:
repimexp /a e /u username /p password /c odbc /d table_owner /r
repository /f dat_file /v y /l logfile
Importing the SIF File into the Siebel OLTP
To import new schema definitions into the Siebel OLTP
1 Copy the file named SRW_76.sif from \dwdb\dwrep to \tools\objects.
2 Open Siebel Tools and point to the development database.
3 Lock the projects named Table ETL and Table Nquire.
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Updating Siebel OLTP Schema Definitions
96 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
4 In the menu, click Tools > Import from Archive.
5 Navigate to the directory containing the SIF files and open srw_76.sif.
The Import Wizard-Preview screen appears.
6 Click Next.
7 Select the option Merge the object definition from the archive file with the
definition in the repository, and click Next.
8 The Import Wizard reviews all the object conflicts between what is in the
repository and what is in the SIF file. When the Import Wizard process is done,
you can expand the tree under Conflicting Objects to verify the changes being
applied from the SIF file to the repository. When you are done, click Next.
9 A warning appears: The operation is going to modify your repository ... Click
Yes.
10 When the process finishes, click Finish.
After you import the new schema into Siebel Tools, you need to apply the schema
to the physical database.
To apply schema definitions to the physical database
1 In Siebel Tools, in the Object Explorer, click on the Table tab and query
for S_ETL_*.
A list of tables appears.
2 Select all the tables in the list and click Apply.
The Apply Schema wizard appears.
3 In the Tables drop-down menu, select Current Query. Enter the appropriate
connection parameters, and click Apply.
Verifying the SIF Patch Application
After the SIF import is complete, verify that the contents of the SIF file were
successfully applied to the repository.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 97
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Creating Siebel Stored Procedures for DB2-UDB
Contents of s_contact_s_etl_ref_param.sif:
Creating Siebel Stored Procedures for DB2-UDB
The DAC uses siebstat and siebtrun stored procedures when running ETL processes.
Typically, these stored procedures will be available in your Siebel OLTP; they may
not be available on the data warehouse database.
To verify the existence of these procedures, follow the steps below.
From a DB2 command prompt or control center, issue the following SQL scripts:
db2 => create table test_siebproc(id int);
DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully.
db2 => insert into test_siebproc(id) values (1);
DB20000I The SQL command completed successfully.
db2 => call siebtrun('TEST_SIEBPROC');
SQL0805N Package "NULLID.SYSSH200" was not found. SQLSTATE=51002
NOTE: If you get an error message, you do not have the Siebel procedures.
Creating stored procedures must be performed by the database administrator.
To create DB2 stored procedures
1 Refer to folder SiebelAnalytics\dwdb\siebproc. It contains complied Siebel
stored procedures for all platforms.
Index Index Columns Project
S_CONTACT_W2 PR_PER_ADDR_ID Table Person
Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse
Creating Siebel Stored Procedures for DB2-UDB
98 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
2 Copy the stored procedures into the appropriate directory on the DB2 server
side, for example, d:\Program Files\SQLLIB\function directory for Windows.
If your DB2 environment is 32-bit, copy siebproc. If it is 64-biy, copy siebproc64
and rename it to siebproc.
This directory also contains the files siebproc.sql and sqlproc.ksh file, which are
used to create the function.
Once these procedures are created, you can verify that they exist. After the test
is complete, you can drop the table TEST_SIEBPROC.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 99
DAC Quick Start
3
This section provides the following topics to help you get started using the Data
Warehouse Application Console (DAC):
Navigating the DAC User Interface on page 100
Logging In to the DAC on page 111
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs on page 112
Using the DAC Query Functionality on page 122
Executing an ETL with the DAC on page 125
Handling ETL Failures with the DAC on page 125
DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface
100 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Navigating the DAC User Interface
Figure 6 shows the main elements of the DAC window.
Main Toolbar of the DAC
The main toolbar of the DAC is located directly under the menu bar. It provides
access to the following views:
Figure 6. Example of DAC Window
Menu bar
Toolbar
Top pane tabs
Top pane toolbar
DAC Server Monitor icon
Navigation tree
Bottom pane tabs
and toolbar
Editable form
(includes right-
click menu)
Editable list
(includes right-
click menu)
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 101
DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface
Design. The Design view provides access to functionality related to creating and
managing execution plans. For more information, see About the DAC Design
View on page 129.
Setup. The Setup View provides access to functionality related to setting up DAC
system properties, Informatica servers, database connections, and email
notification. For more information, see About the DAC Setup View on
page 150.
Execute. The Execute view provides access to functionality related to running,
monitoring, and scheduling execution plans. For more information, see About
the DAC Execute View on page 152.
DAC Toolbars and Right-Click Menu Commands
Table 15 lists commands available in some of the top and bottom pane toolbars and
in the right-click menus. The commands that are available depend on the tab that
is active.
Table 15. DAC Toolbar and Right-Click Menu Commands
Command Location in DAC Description
New Top and bottom
pane toolbars, right-
click menu
Creates a placeholder for a new record in the
selected list.
Save Top and bottom
pane toolbars, right-
click menu
Saves the current record.
Undo Top and bottom
pane toolbars, right-
click menu
Undoes changes made to the current record after
the last save.
Delete Top and bottom
pane toolbars, right-
click menu
Deletes the selected record. If you delete a
parent record, the child records are also deleted.
Query Top and bottom
pane toolbars, right-
click menu
Opens a blank query.
DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface
102 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Refresh Top and bottom
pane toolbars, right-
click menu
Retrieves the data from the repository with the
last used query.
Preview Top pane toolbar in
Design view tabs:
Execution Plans,
Subject Areas, and
Table Groups
Generates a preview of all tasks and their
dependencies.
Edit Bottom pane toolbar
in Design view
Opens a dialog box in which you can add and
remove objects associated with the selected
repository object.
Details Bottom pane toolbar
in Execute view,
Task tab
Provides a list of the task details that are
executed when the selected task is run.
Run Now Top pane toolbar in
Design view,
Execution Plans tab
Starts a new ETL process.
Start Top pane toolbar
and right-click
menu in Execute
View tabs: Current
Run, Run History
Restarts the selected ETL, after the ETL has
failed, stopped, or been aborted.
Stop Top pane toolbar
and right-click
menu in Execute
View tabs: Current
Run, Run History
Stops an ETL in progress. All currently running
tasks will complete, and queued tasks will stop.
The status of the ETL changes to Stopped.
Abort Top pane toolbar
and right-click
menu in Execute
View tabs: Current
Run, Run History
Causes an ETL in progress to abort. All currently
running tasks will be aborted. The status of
queued tasks and the ETL itself will change to
Stopped.
Table 15. DAC Toolbar and Right-Click Menu Commands
Command Location in DAC Description
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 103
DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface
Auto Refresh Top pane toolbar
and right-click
menu in Execute
View tabs: Current
Run, Run History
Allows you to turn on and off the automatic
screen refresh functionality and set the refresh
interval.
Copy String Right-click menu Copies the contents of a cell (editable and read-
only) to the clipboard
Paste String Right-click menu Pastes a string from the clipboard into a selected
cell that supports a string data type.
Copy Record Right-click menu Creates a copy of the selected record, with a
unique record ID and (2) appended to its name.
The new record is committed to the database
when you click the Save button or click outside
the cell. In the Design view tabs (except for the
Indices tab), Copy Record copies the selected
record and the records child records. In the
Design view Indices tab and Setup and Execute
views, Copy Record copies only the selected
record.
Output to File Right-click menu Outputs to a text file in the DAC root folder the
contents of the current tabs record list.
Record Info Right-click menu Displays the records unique ID and the
timestamp for when it was last updated.
Generate Index
Scripts
Right-click menu Generates drop index, create index, and analyze
table scripts for all tables that participate in the
ETL process. The results are stored in the
log\scripts directory.
Generate
Change Capture
Scripts
Right-click menu Generates change capture scripts for tables with
defined image suffixes. The scripts may include
delete triggers, create and drop statements for
delete triggers, and image tables and their
indices.
Table 15. DAC Toolbar and Right-Click Menu Commands
Command Location in DAC Description
DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface
104 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Update Rows Right-click menu For some columns, allows you to update the
column value for each row to a single value.
When you select this command, a dialog box
allows you to select the column, and then a
second dialog box allows you to enter a value for
the column.
Import
Database
Tables
Right-click menu Allows you to import table definitions from a
selected database.
Import Indices Right-click menu Allows you to import index definitions from the
database for one or more tables as listed in the
result of the query.
Output Task
Description
Right-click menu Saves to an HTML file the description for a
selected task definition or for all task definitions.
Run Now Right-click menu Starts a new ETL process.
Go To Right-click menu Allows you to drill down to a particular record
that is associated with the selected record.
Available when the Task Definitions, Indices,
Tables, and Table Groups tabs are active (Design
View).
Mark as
Completed
Right-click menu Changes the status of a stopped or failed ETL to
Completed. In the audit trail for this ETL, the
status is Marked as Completed. Use this
command with caution; it can cause the data
warehouse to be inconsistent.
Requeue Task Right-click menu Changes the status of the selected, completed
task and its dependents to Queued. Available
only for failed ETLs.
Get Run
Information >
Get Log File
Right-click menu Fetches the log file for this run from the DAC
server and saves it in the ServerLog folder.
Get Run
Information >
Analyze Run
Right-click menu Saves a description of the run as an HTML file in
the Log/Statistics folder.
Table 15. DAC Toolbar and Right-Click Menu Commands
Command Location in DAC Description
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 105
DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface
Menu Bar of the DAC
The menu bar is located in the upper-left corner or the DAC window. It consists of
the File, Views, Tools, and Help menus.
File Menu
The File menu contains one command, Close, which closes the application window.
Views Menu
The Views menu provides access to each of the views available in the DAC. The
main menu options are Design, Setup, and Execute. These are the same options that
are available in the toolbar.
Tools Menu
The Tools menu provides access to various tools you can use to manage and
monitor the DAC repository, DAC server, and ETL process.
Get Run
Information >
Get Chart
Right-click menu Displays a chart showing changes in task
statuses over time in a separate window.
Get Run
Information >
Get Graph
Right-click menu Displays a graph showing changes in task
statuses over time in a separate window.
Table 15. DAC Toolbar and Right-Click Menu Commands
Command Location in DAC Description
DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface
106 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Table 16 provides a description of the tools available in the Tools menu.
Table 16. DAC Tools Menu Commands
Tools Menu Command Description
DAC Repository Management
> Export
Allows you to export all or part of the DAC metadata in
order to back up the data or to reproduce the environment
elsewhere. The seed data is exported in XML format and
is stored in the DAC\export directory.
In the Export dialog box, you can select the following
options:
Export All Tables.
Export Categories. The Logical option exports all
information contained in the Design view and
database connection information. The Run Time
option exports all information contained in the
Execute view. The System option exports all
information contained in the Setup view, except
passwords for servers and database connections.
Export Selected Tables. Allows you to select tables for
exporting.
DAC Repository Management
> Import
Allows you to import all or part of the DAC metadata.
When you import data, any existing data in the repository
is overwritten.
If you want to import new DAC metadata while still
working on the same data warehouse, you must keep the
table refresh dates intact.
In the Import dialog box, you can select the following
options:
Import All Tables.
Import Categories. The Logical option imports all
information contained in the Design view and
database connection information. The Run Time
option imports all information contained in the
Execute view. The System option imports all
information contained in the Setup view, except
passwords for servers and database connections.
Import Selected Tables. Allows you to select tables for
importing.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 107
DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface
DAC Repository Management
> Validate Repository
Allows you to start the repository validation process.
DAC Repository Management
> Import Informatica
Sessions
Allows you to import a list of Informatica workflow
names and folders into a staging table in the DAC
repository.
DAC Repository Management
> Purge Run Details
Allows you to purge completed runs from the run history.
You can purge all runs (except the last run) or specify
particular runs to be purged. Note: The last run cannot be
purged.
In the Purging Runs... dialog box, the following options
are available:
Entire Run History. Allows you to purge all runs and
their related information. The data warehouse must
be reset for this option to complete successfully.
All. Purges all completed runs except for the last run.
By Execution Plan. Allows you to select an execution
plan whose associated runs you want to purge.
By Run Name. Allows you to select an individual run
for purging.
Before Specified Date. Allows you to select a date
before which all runs except the last run will be
purged.
Details Only. Purges all related information about a
run but leaves the run header information.
DAC Repository Management
> Analyze Repository Tables
Allows you to run analyze table commands for all the
DAC repository tables.
DAC Repository Management
> Drop DAC Repository
Allows you to drop all the DAC repository tables. This
action deletes all data in the repository.
DAC Server Management >
Get Server Log
When the DAC server is running an ETL process, this
command opens a text box that displays streaming data
related to the process.
DAC Server Management >
DAC Server Setup
Allows you to configure the DAC server connections and
server email settings. This action should be performed on
the machine where the DAC server is running.
Table 16. DAC Tools Menu Commands
Tools Menu Command Description
DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface
108 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Help Menu
The Help Menu provides access to two dialog boxes: the Login Details dialog box,
which contains login information; and the About DAC Client dialog box, which
contains the DAC version number.
ETL Management >
Configure
Opens the Data Warehouse Configuration wizard, which
you can use to configure an ETL process.
ETL Management > Reset
Data Warehouse
Clears the refresh dates for all source and target tables.
This action forces a full load to occur.
ETL Management >
Preferences
Allows you to configure ETL preferences, such as start
and end dates for building the day dimension, currency,
language, exchange rate, prune days for disconnected
users, maximum number of days an opportunity can
spend in a sales stage, and the index space for Oracle
databases.
Task Properties > Task
Phases
Allows you to add or edit task phases.
Task Properties > Task
Folders
Allows you to add or edit task folders.
UI Styles > Windows (MFC) Changes the user interface to the Windows style.
UI Styles > UNIX (MOTIF) Changes the user interface to the UNIX style.
UI Styles > Java (METAL) Changes the user interface to the Java style.
Table 16. DAC Tools Menu Commands
Tools Menu Command Description
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 109
DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface
DAC Server Monitor Icon
The Server Monitor is located in the upper-right corner of the DAC client. Its color
and shape change based on the DAC server status. When the DAC client cannot
establish a connection to the DAC server, the Server Monitor icon resembles a red
electrical plug. When the client is connected to the server and the server is idle, the
icon resembles an orange electrical plug in a socket. Finally, if the client is
connected to a server that is running an ETL process, the icon resembles a green
electrical plug with a lightning sign superimposed on it. In addition, clicking on the
icon when there is a connection to the server opens a text box that displays data
related to the ETL process.
Table 17. DAC Server Monitor Icons
Icon Description
DAC client cannot establish a connection to the DAC
server.
DAC client is connected to the server, and the server
is idle.
DAC client is connected to a server that is running an
ETL process.
DAC Quick Start
Navigating the DAC User Interface
110 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
DAC Navigation Tree
The navigation tree appears on the left side of the DAC window, as shown in
Figure 7. The tree root nodes correspond to the tabs in the top pane of the DAC
window. When a plus sign (+) appears before a node, you can expand the node to
view the records belonging to the node. You can double-click a record in the tree to
have it display in the top pane in a single-record mode (New, Delete, Copy Record,
and Query commands are unavailable), and double-click the root node to return to
the list mode.
Figure 7. DAC Navigation Tree
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 111
DAC Quick Start
Logging In to the DAC
DAC Editable Lists
The top and bottom panes of the DAC window display records in a list format. Some
of the columns in the list are editable, and others are read-only. The toolbar at the
top of each pane allows you to perform various tasks associated with a selected
record in the list. For a description of the toolbar commands, see and DAC Toolbars
and Right-Click Menu Commands on page 101.
A right-click menu is also accessible from the lists in both the top and bottom panes.
For a description of these commands, see Menu Bar of the DAC on page 105.
The list format allows you to do the following:
Edit the data in place and save the record by either clicking another record in the
list or clicking the Save button.
Reorder the columns.
Sort the data in the list by clicking on the column name.
Select predefined values from picklists.
For fields that refer to values from other entities, use the query functionality in
pop-up dialog boxes.
Use Ctrl+C to copy an editable string to the clipboard (not available for read-
only strings).
Ctrl+V to paste a string from the clipboard into a selected cell that supports a
string data type.
Logging In to the DAC
The DAC application connects to a database called the DAC repository, which
contains definitions of DAC application objects. When you log in to DAC for the first
time, you need to configure the database connection to the DAC repository. You can
also connect to multiple DAC repositories by configuring multiple database
connections, but only one DAC repository is active at a time.
DAC Quick Start
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs
112 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
To log in to DAC for the first time
1 Navigate to the directory where DAC is installed and double-click
startclient.bat.
2 In the Login ... dialog box, select Configure.
3 In the Configuring ... dialog box, select Create Connection, and then click Next.
4 In the Connection Details area of the Configuring ... dialog box, enter the
appropriate information for the database to which you want to connect.
5 Click Test Connection to make sure you configured the database correctly.
When you connect to a database for the first time, a DAC repository schema is
created if it does not already exist.
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs
Execution plans are groups of subject areas that are used to execute ETL processes.
For more information about the repository objects that are the components that
make up execution plans, see About DAC Repository Objects on page 18. For
information about DAC functionality, see DAC Functional Reference on page 129.
For detailed information about customizing execution plans, see Customizing the
Siebel Data Warehouse on page 161.
In designing an execution plan, you should consider the following questions:
Tables. Which tables need to be populated for the data warehouse. From which
tables does your organization source data?
Indices. Do the target tables have the correct indices defined?
Tasks. Are the tasks that load this table defined?
Dependencies. What does a task require to be run?
Table groups. Do table groups need to be built?
Subject areas. Do the subject areas cover all the relevant table groups?
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 113
DAC Quick Start
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs
Execution plans. Which subject areas need to be refreshed and how often and at
what time frequency?
When an execution plan is run, the DAC server uses the following logic to identify
the tasks that need to be run and their order of execution:
1 Initial selection of tables.
a Find all the subject areas.
b Find all the table groups that belong to the subject areas.
c Find all the tables that belong to the table groups.
2 Recursive selection of related tables.
Recursively find all the table groups and their tables with the above list of tables.
For a description of this process, see About the DAC Table Groups Tab on
page 135.
3 Initial selection of tasks.
Find all the tasks that load into the tables selected above, that is, tasks whose
target table is one of the selected tables (the tasks that are non-optional).
4 Recursive selection of all tasks.
a Depending on the non-optional dependency rules, recursively figure out the
prerequisite tasks.
b Depending on the optional dependency rules, figure out the optional tasks.
5 Filter tasks based on the database connections that will participate in the ETL.
6 Selection of dependencies.
Load dependencies to identify the execution order.
7 Identify the task details.
Iterate through all the tasks selected and compute the task details based on
whether the target table is loaded in full mode or incremental mode.
8 Identify the list of source tables for change capture, create tasks for change
capture, and sync for Siebel source tables.
DAC Quick Start
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs
114 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
In the DAC, the Design view allows you to view and modify the relationships among
the repository objects discussed above. For more information about the Design
view, see About the DAC Design View on page 129.
Pruning Execution Plans in the DAC
The Siebel Data Warehouse includes preconfigured execution plans. The Complete
ETL execution plan contains a single subject area, named All Subject Areas, which
includes all the table groups of the star type. There are also preconfigured execution
plans for marketing, sales, forecast, and service. If none of the preconfigured
execution plans meet the needs of your organization, you can define your own
subject areas and build stars as needed. You can also modify an existing execution
plan to meet your needs by inactivating its child objects.
Pruning Subject Areas in the DAC
A subject area is a group of table groups (stars). For example, the subject area
named Sales Subject Area may consist of the following stars: Order, Opportunity,
and Quote. Including a subject area in an execution plan means that all the tables
that belong to the table groups and the related table groups will be populated during
the ETL process.
You can add and remove table groups from the preconfigured subject areas, or you
can remove a table group from a subject area by inactivating the table group.
You can also create a new subject area by associating it with the appropriate table
groups. You can create a subject area with any kind of table group, but it is
recommended that you use table groups of the star type. A star usually consists of
a fact table, dimensions, and aggregates (if any).
Pruning Table Groups in the DAC
A table group is a logical grouping of tables that defines a logical relationship among
all the component tables. The table group definition is based on a main table that
drives the relationship between itself and the other tables in the group.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 115
DAC Quick Start
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs
A table can be a main table for only one table group. When you design a table
group, you associate it with a list of tables that need to be populated whenever the
main table participates in an ETL. The tables can be main tables for other table
groups; in such cases, when an ETL is run, the DAC server recursively includes all
necessary tables. This process in which the tables are recursively populated is called
chaining.
You can prune a table group by inactivating one or more of the tables associated
with it. When designing an execution plan, inspect the table groups that you are
interested in. If there are dimensions in a fact table that you are not interested in
populating during the ETL process, inactivate them or remove the table association.
This might also require you to modify the workflows and dependencies as well. Use
the Preview functionality to figure out if your design is correct at the table group,
subject area, and execution plan level.
CAUTION: If a table is removed from one table group but is still active in others that
belong to the execution plan, you will see it appearing in the preview. If the table is
not required for the entire ETL, consider inactivating the table. For more
information about inactivating tables, see The Chaining Process on page 115.
The Chaining Process
When multiple target (data warehouse) tables share the same source table, they
must be populated together. For example, the Person Fact table group contains the
tables listed below. The main table for this table group is W_PERSON_F. When
W_PERSON_F participates in an ETL, the other tables listed below also participate.
W_PERSON_D is the main table for the Person Dimension table group; whenever it
participates in an ETL, the other tables that are part of the Person Dimension table
group also participate in the ETL.
Name Main Table for Group Relationship Type
W_GEO_D GEO DIMENSION GORUP Dimension
W_PERSON_F PERSON FACT GROUP Self
W_PERSON_D PERSON DIMENSION GROUP Dimension
W_ORG_D ORGANIZATION DIMENSION
GROUP
Dimension
W_DAY_D DAY DIMENSION GROUP Dimension
DAC Quick Start
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs
116 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
A similar kind of chaining concept is used for entities that have parent-child
relationships. When a parent table participates in an ETL, its child tables also get
populated. For example, the Order Dimension and Order Item Fact tables have a
parent-child relationship. When the Order Dimension table is part of a table group
that participates in an ETL, the Order Item Fact table will also be populated.
Therefore, when pruning the data warehouse, you should start with the table
groups of type star and verify that all the related tables are required. If a table is not
required and it is a parent table, you need to disable the link between it and the
child tables that you do not want to populate. For information about disabling
entities, see Disabling DAC Repository Entities on page 117.
The chaining process is used for the following reasons:
To maintain data integrity
For example, when the Person Fact table group is built, the Person Dimension
group is also populated.
Two or more data warehouse tables can share the same source table
When multiple data warehouse tables (target tables) share the same source
table, they must be populated together. For example, the tables W_PERSON_F
and W_PERSON_D have the same main source table, S_CONTACT. Suppose you
want to populate the Revenue Fact table group, which has W_REVN_F as its
main table and W_PERSON_D as one of the dimension tables. Whenever the
Revenue Fact table group is chosen for an ETL execution, W_PERSON_F is also
populated because W_PERSON_F is chained to W_PERSON_D.
To maintain parent-child relationships
For example, when the Order Dimension table is built, the Order Item Fact table
also must be populated, otherwise the data will not be in sync.
W_INDUSTRY_D INDUSTRY IDMENSION GROUP Dimension
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 117
DAC Quick Start
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs
Pruning Tasks and Dependencies in the DAC
A task is a command that is used to populate a certain table or tables. Tasks can
have prerequisite tasks that need to be executed prior to its own execution. These
are defined as dependency rules. There are mandatory and optional dependencies.
For example, Load into Activity Fact has a mandatory dependency on Extract into
Activity Fact, but has optional dependency on all the tasks that load the dimensions.
This is because loading of the Activity Fact table cannot be accomplished until its
extract is done. However, if the dimension tables are not absolutely necessary, that
is, if part of the pruning process eliminates a certain table from the initial list of
tables selected, then the load task will not wait for that optional tasks.
Disabling DAC Repository Entities
You can disable entities at different levels for the sake of pruning.
If certain tables are not required by a table group, you can remove the tables
from the table group or inactivate them. You might also need to review and
modify the Informatica workflows.
If a task that is loading/updating a certain table is deemed not necessary, you
can inactivate it.
If a task is depending on another task, and is deemed not necessary, you can
remove the dependency or inactivate the link.
If a table is not required in the whole of the ETL process, you can disable the
table, and none of the tasks that write to it will be chosen for execution.
Once the dependencies are correctly defined, the DAC server will execute them in
proper order during ETL execution.
Using the DAC Preview Functionality to View Tasks and Dependencies
You can verify the design of an execution plan using the Preview functionality,
which is accessible from the top pane toolbars of the Execution Plans, Subject
Areas, and Table Groups tabs, and in the right-click menu on these tabs.
DAC Quick Start
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs
118 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
The Preview functionality generates a preview of all tasks and their dependencies
using the DAC server logic described in Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs
on page 112. This process reviews an execution plans associated subject areas,
table groups, and tables to identify tasks and their dependencies.
The preview shows the approximate order in which tasks will be executed, and a
list of source tables, target tables, and tables for which an image will be built. Only
the tasks that source or write to database connections as defined in the execution
plan will be included. The preview also shows a detailed analysis of the
dependencies. By reviewing the preview, you can validate the design of your
execution plan without having to run the ETL.
The preview has three parts. The first part is titled, Initial Selection of Tables going
through the related Table Groups. This part shows the selection of tables to be
populated by table group and is created by iterating through the table groups. The
selection process starts with the initial, distinct list of all the table groups (iteration
0) and goes through the related table groups (iteration 1, 2, and so on), selecting
tables that are not already on the list of chosen tables.
The second part of the preview is titled, Task Selection Analysis. This part shows
the task program. It starts with the tasks that write to any of the tables selected
during the table selection process. The DAC server logic goes through the
dependency definitions, selecting all the mandatory (non-optional) tasks and then
selecting all the optional tasks. Eventually, the dependencies define the order of
execution.
The third part of the preview is titled, Step Dependency Analysis. This part shows,
for all given tasks, the following information:
Depends On. The immediate tasks that a given task depends on.
Dependents. The tasks that are dependent on a given task.
Number of All Depends. All the Depends On tasks.
Number of All Dependents. All the Dependent tasks.
This part of the preview is useful for understanding how a task relates to all other
tasks, which can be helpful for debugging.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 119
DAC Quick Start
Tailoring Execution Plans for Your Needs
Figure 8 shows the dependencies of various tasks: task A depends on tasks B and
C, task B depends on tasks D and E, and task D depends on tasks F and G.
Figure 8. Task Dependencies
DAC Quick Start
Distributing DAC Metadata
120 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
In Figure 9 the tasks are shown as grouped by the DAC server based on the level of
dependency. (The level of dependency is referred to as a depth.) Tasks that have no
dependencies are depth 0. Tasks that depend on other tasks of depth 0 are depth 1.
Tasks that depend on other tasks of depth 1 or 0 are depth 2, and so on.
Because the DAC server dynamically prioritizes the tasks that are eligible to run
based on the number of resources available, it uses the information generated by
the preview to decide which tasks to execute. When more than one task is eligible
to be run, a series of prioritization rules is applied.
Distributing DAC Metadata
Typically, you may have multiple environments, such as development, QA,
production, and so on. When you make changes to the development environment,
you test it, and then deliver it, exporting the whole environment and distributing it
to the other environments. The data is exported as XML files, which are stored in
the DAC\export directory on the client machine where the export is done.
To apply changes from the development environment to any other, you copy all of
the XML files into the DAC\export folder and then import the data.
Figure 9. Task Dependencies by Depth
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 121
DAC Quick Start
Distributing DAC Metadata
To distribute DAC metadata from the development environment to another
environment
1 In the DAC, select Tools > DAC Repository Management > Export.
The Export dialog box appears.
2 Select one of the following options:
Export All Tables. Select this option to duplicate the entire environment. All
tables in the DAC repository and the information in the Design view
associated with them are exported as XML files and stored in the DAC\export
folder. Exercise caution when selecting this option, because when you import
this data, it replaces all run-time information that exists on the database
where the import is performed.
Export Categories. Select this option to export part of the data from the
development environment. The data is stored as XML files in the DAC\export
folder. Select one of the following categories:
Logical. Exports all information contained in the Design view and the
database connection information. This option preserves all the run data
in the new environment, including refresh dates.
Run Time. Exports the run-time information but preserves all the logical
definitions in the new environment. You may seldom have to select this
option.
System. Exports system preferences, ETL preferences, and email recipient
information. Passwords for servers and database connections are not
exported.
3 Copy the XML files from the DAC\export folder in the development environment
to the DAC\export folder on the local machine in the new environment.
4 In the DAC, in the new environment, select Tools > DAC Repository
Management > Import.
The Import dialog box appears.
5 Select the import option that corresponds to the export option you selected in
step 2. The following options are available:
DAC Quick Start
Using the DAC Query Functionality
122 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Import All Tables. For security reasons, this option does not populate the
password fields. Make sure you update the passwords before attempting to
run an ETL process.
Import Categories. Select one of the following categories:
Logical
Run Time
System
Using the DAC Query Functionality
Querying is a way to locate one or more records that meet your specified criteria.
Query functionality is available in every DAC screen. When you enter query mode,
the Edit and Description child tabs in the bottom pane are not available.
DAC Query Commands and Operators
You can use the query commands and operators in Table 18 to define your query
criteria.
Table 18. DAC Query Commands and Operators
Operator Description
= Placed before a value, returns records containing a
value equal to the query value.
< Placed before a value, returns records containing a
value less than the query value.
> Placed before a value, returns records containing a
value greater than the query value.
<> Placed before a value, returns records containing a
value that is not equal to the query value.
<= Placed before a value, returns records containing a
value less than or equal to the query value.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 123
DAC Quick Start
Using the DAC Query Functionality
DAC Query Examples
The following examples show different ways you can query on the Name column
of the Tasks tab.
Extract* lists all tasks whose name starts with Extract.
*Extract* lists all tasks whose name contains the word Extract.
!Extract* lists all tasks whose name does not start with the word Extract.
!null lists all tasks whose name is not null.
>= Placed before a value, returns records containing a
value greater than or equal to the query value.
* Wildcard that can be placed in the middle, or at the
beginning or end of a text string.
! Used for negation.
Surrounds a string that, unless modified by a
wildcard, must be matched exactly.
\ Escape symbol is used when double quotes should
not be processed as a special symbol. For example,
!(*null textor(\*\)) is a value
expression for a text field. The query returns values
that do not end with a string null text and that
are not surrounded by double quotes.
() Surrounds the values and operators that will be
processed first.
NULL Returns records for which the query field is blank.
(Not case sensitive.)
AND Placed between values, returns only records for
which all the given conditions are true. (Not case
sensitive.)
OR Placed between values, returns records for which at
least one condition is true. (Not case sensitive.)
Table 18. DAC Query Commands and Operators
Operator Description
DAC Quick Start
Using the DAC Query Functionality
124 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Extract* or Aggregate* lists all tasks whose name starts with Extract or
Aggregate.
Load* and *Aggregate* lists all tasks whose name starts with Load and also
contains the word Aggregate.
Extract for Wave Dimension or Load into Wave Dimension lists
tasks whose name is either Extract for Wave Dimension or Load into Wave
Dimension.
NOTE: When using spaces within strings, you need to surround the string with
quotes ().
Common DAC Query Procedures
This section includes instructions for common query procedures.
To create and execute a query in the DAC
1 In the top or bottom pane of the DAC, click Query on the toolbar or in right-click
menu.
A blank row in a list appears.
2 Enter the query criteria in the appropriate fields.
3 Click Run Query on the toolbar.
The query is executed and the records appear.
To enter a query value in a date field
1 In the date field, click the calendar icon on the right side of the cell.
The Date dialog box appears.
2 Enter the date and time for which you want to search, and select the appropriate
query condition.
You can use the query commands and operators listed in DAC Query
Commands and Operators.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 125
DAC Quick Start
Executing an ETL with the DAC
Executing an ETL with the DAC
Execution plans are subject areas that are used to execute ETL processes. Before you
attempt to run an ETL, do the following:
Set ETL preferences. For more information, see Setting DAC ETL Preferences
on page 73.
Set database connections to the OLTP and the data warehouse. For more
information, see Creating Database Connections on page 80.
Register the Informatica Servers. For more information see, Registering
Informatica Servers on page 79.
To execute an ETL with the DAC
1 Launch the DAC client by double-clicking the startclient.bat file in the DAC
directory or by running startclient from a command prompt.
2 Navigate to the Execution Plans tab in the Design view.
3 Select the execution plan you want to execute.
4 Click Run Now.
Once the ETL starts running you can monitor its progress in the Current Run tab
of the Execute view. For more information about monitoring an ETL, see About
the DAC Current Run Tab on page 152 and About the DAC Run History Tab
on page 156.
Handling ETL Failures with the DAC
This section includes the following topics:
When the Execution of an Execution Plan Fails on page 126
In Case of Abnormal Termination of the DAC Server on page 126
Discarding the Current Run Execution Plan on page 127
Failure of Aggregator Transformation Tasks with Sorted Input on page 127
DAC Quick Start
Handling ETL Failures with the DAC
126 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Performing a Full Load Again on page 127
When the Execution of an Execution Plan Fails
When an execution plan is executed, if a task fails, the status of the tasks that are
dependent on the failed task is changed to Stopped. While tasks are still running,
the execution plans status is Running. When all the tasks have been run, and if one
or more tasks have failed, the execution plans status is changed to Failed.
You can check the tasks that have failed in the Current Run tab of the Execute view,
fix the problems, and then requeue the failed tasks by changing the status to
Queued. You can then restart the ETL. All the tasks will then be rerun. You can also
manually run a task, change its status to Completed, and then restart the ETL. Tasks
with a Completed status are skipped.
CAUTION: The DAC server does not validate tasks that have been run manually.
To restart a Failed ETL, click Run Now from the Current Run tab of the Execute view.
In Case of Abnormal Termination of the DAC Server
If the DAC server fails during the execution of the ETL, the status of the ETL
execution will remain as Running. When the DAC server is started again, it will
automatically run the ETL if the Auto Start ETL system preference is set to True. If
the same system preference is set to False, when the server restarts, it will set the
correct status as Failed. In order to execute the ETL from the point of failure, submit
the request to the server again.
The DAC server will automatically terminate if it looses connection to the DAC
repository.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 127
DAC Quick Start
Handling ETL Failures with the DAC
Discarding the Current Run Execution Plan
You can discard an execution plan that failed by navigating to the Current Run tab,
right-clicking on the execution plan and changing its status to Mark as Completed.
This will force the run status to be updated as Completed. When you submit a
request for another run, the DAC server creates another instance of it.
CAUTION: Perform this procedure in a development or testing environment only,
since it might leave the data in an inconsistent state, causing you to have to reload
all of the data.
Failure of Aggregator Transformation Tasks with Sorted Input
Tasks that use Informatica Aggregator transformation can fail when the Sorted Input
option is active. The tasks SDE_DTLFORECASTFACT and SDE_COSTLIST are
examples of tasks that can fail in such a situation.
To prevent such tasks from failing, in Informatica Designer, navigate to Mapping
Designer, open the corresponding mapping, and in the Aggregator transformation,
remove the check from the Sorted Input check box.
Performing a Full Load Again
In test environments, after running several ETLs, you might want to perform a full
load again. You do this by accessing Tools > ETL Management > Reset Data
Warehouse.
CAUTION: This procedure will cause the DAC server to perform a full load the next
time an ETL is run, which will truncate data from the target tables. Therefore, this
action should be used only in development and testing environments. You should
not perform this procedure in a production environment unless you plan to rebuild
the data warehouse in its entirety.
DAC Quick Start
Handling ETL Failures with the DAC
128 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 129
DAC Functional Reference
4
This section describes the functionality available in the Siebel Data Warehouse
Application Console (DAC). The DAC functionality is grouped based on three views:
Design, Setup, and Execute. These views are accessible from the DAC toolbar.
About the DAC Design View
The DAC Design view provides access to functionality related to creating and
managing execution plans. The top pane of the Design view contains tabs, each of
which represents a component of the execution plan. The bottom pane of the
Design view contains subtabs that relate to the tab selected in the top pane. The
navigation tree allows you to see the hierarchical relationship among all the DAC
repository objects.
This section includes the following topics:
About the DAC Execution Plans Tab on page 130
About the DAC Subject Areas Tab on page 134
About the DAC Table Groups Tab on page 135
About the DAC Tables Tab on page 136
About the DAC Indices Tab on page 139
About the DAC Task Definitions Tab on page 142
Using SQL Files as an Execution Type in the DAC on page 148
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
130 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
About the DAC Execution Plans Tab
The Execution Plans tab displays a list of execution plans in the top pane. This list
includes the execution plan name and an Inactive column, which indicates whether
the execution plan is active or inactive. Inactive execution plans do not participate
in the ETL process.
Table 19 provides a description of the subtabs in the bottom pane.
Table 19. DAC Execution Plans Subtabs
Tab Description
Edit Allows you to edit the execution plan selected in the top pane.
Description Displays a description of the execution plan selected in the top
pane.
Subject Areas Displays a list of subject areas associated with the execution plan
selected in the top pane.
Database
Connections
Displays a list of database connections associated with the
execution plan selected in the top pane. In order for a task to
participate in the ETL process, the tasks source and target must
match the list of database connections displayed here. You can
inactivate a database connection by selecting the Inactive check
box. If you inactivate a database connection, all tasks that read or
write to it are eliminated.
Tables (Read Only) Displays a read-only list of the initial tables that participate in an
ETL. For a complete list of tables participating in the ETL, use the
Preview functionality.
The list of tables contains the following column headings:
Name. Name of the target table.
Main Table for Group. If the table is a main table for a table
group, the group name is displayed in this column.
Table Type. Table type as defined in the table properties.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 131
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
Actions Available
The following actions are available in the top pane toolbar and in the right-click
menu when the Executions Plan tab is active.
Preview Command
This command generates a preview of all tasks and their dependencies by reviewing
the subject areas, table groups, tables, and tasks. Information provided includes the
approximate order in which tasks are executed, a list of source tables, target tables,
and tables for which an image will be built. Only the tasks that source or write to
database connections as defined in the execution plan are included. For more
information about the Preview functionality, see Using the DAC Preview
Functionality to View Tasks and Dependencies on page 117.
Preceding Tasks Displays a list of tasks that must be completed before an ETL is
executed.
The list of tasks contains the following column headings:
Name. Name of the task.
Priority. Indicates the order in which the task runs. If two or
more tasks have the same priority, the order occurs randomly.
Inactive. Allows you to inactivate a task by selecting the check
box.
Command. Command associated with the task.
Following Tasks Displays a list of tasks that must be completed after an ETL is
executed.
The list of tasks contains the following column headings:
Name. Name of the task.
Priority. Indicates the order in which the task runs. If two or
more tasks have the same priority, the order occurs randomly.
Inactive. Allows you to inactivate a task by selecting the check
box.
Command. Command associated with the task.
Table 19. DAC Execution Plans Subtabs
Tab Description
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
132 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Copy Record
This command creates a copy of the selected execution plan and also copies the
references to subject areas and database connections.
Generate Index Scripts Command
This command generates drop index, create index, and analyze table scripts for all
the tables that participate in the ETL process. The results are stored in the
log\scripts directory. The index scripts are separated by ETL indices and query
indices. The DAC server automatically drops and creates indices and analyzes the
tables. This option can be turned off by setting the system preferences. It is
recommended that this option be turned off only for DB2-390 environments.
Run Now Command
This command submits a request to the DAC server to execute the execution plan.
Inactive execution plans are not included in the process.
When an execution plan is run, the following logic is used to identify the tasks that
need to be run and their order of execution.
1 Check on the previous run status.
a If the previous run executed a different execution plan from the one currently
submitted (either manually or through the scheduler), abort the run.
b If the previous run executed is the same as the current execution plan and
did not complete, continue from where it left off.
c If the previous run has completed, create a new run.
2 Check resources.
a If the DAC server cannot establish connections to the databases defined for
that execution plan, abort the run.
b If there are no Informatica servers registered, abort the run.
c If the Informatica servers are registered and the DAC server is unable to ping
them, abort the run.
3 Select initial tables.
a Find all the subject areas.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 133
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
b Find all the table groups that belong the subject areas.
4 Recursively select related tables.
a Recursively find all the table groups and their tables with the above list of
tables.
5 Select initial tasks.
a Find all the tasks that load into the above selected tables. (Tasks whose target
table is one of the selected tables and that are non-optional.)
6 Recursively select all tasks.
a Depending on the non-optional dependency rules, figure out the prerequisite
tasks recursively.
7 Select optional tasks.
a With the tasks already chosen, recursively find the optional tasks.
8 Select dependencies.
a Load dependencies and compute for each task the number of all Depends On
tasks. This number will be decremented for tasks higher up in the hierarchy
as each of the tasks complete. When the number of Depends On tasks
reaches zero, the task itself will become eligible to be run.
9 Identify the task details.
a Iterate through all the tasks selected, compute the task dependencies.
10 Identify the list of source tables for change capture and create tasks for change
capture and sync for Siebel sources.
a Iterate through all the tasks and find the primary or auxiliary tables and
group them by source database connection.
11 Execute pre-ETL tasks. If there are errors, stop the run.
12 Execute the change capture process. If there are errors, stop the process.
13 Execute the dependency graph. If there are errors, stop all the tasks that depend
on the failed tasks. Continue to execute all others, until there are no more to run,
and then stop.
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
134 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
14 Execute the change capture sync process. If there are errors, stop the process.
15 Execute the post-ETL process. If there are errors, stop the process.
About the DAC Subject Areas Tab
A subject area is a logical grouping of table groups that is related to a particular
subject or application context.
The Subject Areas tab displays a list of subject areas in the top pane. This list
includes the subject area name and an Inactive column, which indicates whether
the subject area is active or inactive. Inactive subject areas do not participate in the
ETL process.
Table 20 provides a description of the subtabs in the bottom pane.
Actions Available
The following actions are available in the top pane toolbar and in the right-click
menu when the Subject Areas tab is active.
Table 20. DAC Subject Areas Subtabs
Tab Description
Edit Allows you to edit the subject area selected in the top pane.
Description Displays a description of the subject area selected in the top pane.
Table Groups Displays a list of table groups associated with the subject area
selected in the top pane. You can inactivate a table group by
selecting the Inactive check box.
Tables (Read Only) Displays a read-only list of the initial tables that participate in an
ETL. For a complete list of tables participating in the ETL, use the
Preview functionality.
The list of tables contains the following column headings:
Name. Name of the target table.
Main Table for Group. If the table is a main table for a table
group, the group name is displayed in this column.
Table Type. Table type as defined in the table properties.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 135
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
Preview Command
This command generates a preview of all tasks and their dependencies by reviewing
the table groups, tables, and tasks. Information provided includes the approximate
order in which tasks are executed, a list of source tables, target tables, and tables
for which an image will be built. The preview will include all tasks regardless of the
source or target. Unlike the preview generated from the Execution Plans tab, this
preview includes all the tasks, regardless of the source or target.
Copy Record
This command creates a copy of the selected subject area and also copies the
references to table groups.
About the DAC Table Groups Tab
The Table Groups tab displays a list of table groups in the top pane. This list
includes the name and type of the table group, the main table of the table group,
and an Inactive column, which indicates whether the table group is active or
inactive. Inactive table groups do not participate in the ETL process.
Table 21 provides a description of the tabs in the bottom pane.
Table 21. DAC Table Groups Subtab
Tab Description
Edit Allows you to edit the table group selected in the top pane.
Description Displays a description of the table group selected in the top pane.
Tables Displays a list of the initial tables that participate in an ETL. For a
complete list of tables participating in the ETL, use the Preview
functionality.
The list of tables contains the following column headings:
Name. Name of the target table.
Main Table for Group. A read-only column showing if the table
is a main table for another table group.
Relationship Type. Relationship type describing how the table
relates to the main table. For documentation purposes only.
Inactive. Indicates whether the tables relationship to the table
group is active or inactive.
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
136 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Actions Available
The following actions are available in the top pane toolbar and in the right-click
menu when the Table Groups tab is active.
Copy Record
This command creates a copy of the selected table group and also copies the
references to tables.
Preview Command
This command generates a preview of all tasks and their dependencies by reviewing
the tables and tasks. Information provided includes the approximate order in which
tasks are executed, a list of source tables, target tables, and tables for which an
image will be built. Unlike the preview generated from the Execution Plans tab, this
preview includes all the tasks, regardless of the source or target.
About the DAC Tables Tab
The Tables tab displays a list of tables in the top pane. This list includes the
following information shown in Table 22.
Table 22. DAC Tables Tab List Columns
Column Description
Name Name of table.
Table Type Indicates the type of target table. There is no differentiation for
source tables.
Image Suffix Applicable to Siebel source tables only. For more
information, see Change Capture Scripts Command on
page 138.
Inactive Indicates whether a table is active or inactive. Inactive tables do not
participate in the ETL process.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 137
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
Table 23 provides a description of the tabs in the bottom pane.
Actions Available
The following actions are available in the top pane toolbar and in the right-click
menu when the Tables tab is active.
Copy Record
This command creates a copy of the selected table and also copies the references to
database connections.
Generate Index Scripts Command
This command generates drop index, create index, and analyze table scripts for all
the tables that participate in the ETL process. You can query for one or more tables,
and the command will generate all the scripts for all the tables. The results are
stored in the log\scripts directory. Files are generated that provide the following
information: drop indices of type ETL, create indices of type ETL, drop indices of
type Query, create indices of type Query, and analyze tables.
Table 23. DAC Tables Subtabs
Tab Description
Edit Allows you to edit the table selected in the top pane.
Description Displays a description of the table selected in the top pane.
Database
Connections
Displays a list of data sources associated with the table selected in
the top pane. The Edit button allows you to add or remove data
sources.
Indices Displays a read-only list of indices that belong to the table selected
in the top pane.
Source for Tasks Displays a read-only list of tasks that use the table selected in the
top pane as a source.
Target for Tasks Displays a read-only list of tasks that use the table selected in the
top pane as a target.
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
138 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Change Capture Scripts Command
This command generates change capture scripts for tables with defined image
suffixes. The scripts include creation of the image tables to assist in the change
capture process and their indices. You can also create the triggers for deletes.
However, you should do so with caution because preconfigured tables for the
change capture are created by applying SIF files on the Siebel OLTP. Triggers for
deletes should be used only for new source tables for which you want to use change
capture. The scripts will be generated for the selected table or all the tables shown
in the list applet. You can narrow down the tables of interest by querying. The
results are shown in a text box, which can be supplied to the DBA for executing.
Import Database Tables Command
This command allows you to import table definitions from a selected database. You
will be prompted to choose a database connection from a list that has already been
defined in the DAC repository. When this command is executed, a list of tables in
the data source is shown in a list applet. Check the Import flag in the list applet to
select the tables that you want to import. The tables are then brought into the DAC
repository. The default table type associated with the newly imported tables is
Other. After you import the tables, change the table type to the appropriate type and
associate the table with a database connection.
Import Indices Command
This command allows you to import index definitions from the database for one or
more tables as listed in the result of the query. You will be prompted to select a data
source. The client connects to the database and retrieves the index definitions for
the table. The list includes new indices that may have been created in the database,
indices whose definitions are modified in the database, or indices that do not exist
in the database. To accept the changes, check the Merge? check box. When you
select the list to be merged, one of the following actions will take place: If an index
definition does not exist in the DAC repository, it will be created; if an index
definition exists but the definition is the same, the new definition will be brought
in; or if an index as defined in the repository does not exist is the database, it will
be inactivated.
NOTE: In MSSQL Server databases, when you import indices with columns whose
sort order type is Desc, the sort order type appears in the DAC as Asc. You have
to set the sort order manually to Desc.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 139
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
About the DAC Indices Tab
The Indices tab displays a list of all the indices of all the data warehouse tables. It
is recommended that you do not register any indices for source tables. During the
ETL process, when a table is going to be truncated, all the indices as defined in the
repository will be dropped before the data is loaded and will be created after the
data is loaded automatically. While this improves the ETL performance, the
preconfigured workflows have the bulk load option turned on. The bulk load will
fail if there are indices on the table. Therefore, it is important to keep the index
definitions in sync with the database. For example, if you create an index on the
database, and it is not registered in the repository, the index will not be dropped and
the load will fail.
Table 24 provides a description of the index properties displayed in the list.
Table 24. DAC Indices Tab List Columns
Column Description
Name Unique name with which the index is created.
Table Name Table for which an index is created.
Index Type Type of index: ETL or Query. An ETL index is typically used during
the ETL process. A Query index is an index is used only during the
reporting process. It is recommended that you have a clear
understanding of when and where the index will be used at the
time of registering the index.
# Unique Columns For unique indices, the number of columns that will be unique.
Is Unique Indicates whether the index is unique.
Is Clustered Indicates whether the index is clustered. There can be only one
clustered index per table.
Is Bitmap Indicates whether the index is of the bitmap type.
Allow Reverse Scan Applicable only for DB2-UDB databases. The index will be created
with the Allow Reverse Scan option.
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
140 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Table 25 shows which index properties are available for the different database types
that are supported.
Table 26 provides a description of the tabs in the bottom pane.
Table Space Name Applicable only for Oracle databases. If a table space is mentioned,
an index is created in that particular table space. If all indices go to
a table space different from the data area, you can define it in the
ETL Preferences (Tools > ETL Management> Preferences).
Inactive Indicates whether an index is active or inactive. Inactive indices do
not participate in the ETL process.
Table 25. Index Properties and Database Types Matrix
Column/
Database Is Unique Is Clustered Is Bitmap
Allow
Reverse Scan
# Unique
Columns
Oracle X X
DB2 X X X X
DB2-390 X
MSSQL X X
Table 26. Indices Subtabs
Tab Description
Edit Allows you to edit the table selected in the top pane.
Description Displays a description of the table selected in the top pane.
Table 24. DAC Indices Tab List Columns
Column Description
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 141
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
Actions Available
The following actions are available in the top pane toolbar and in the right-click
menu when the Indices tab is active.
Copy Record
This command creates a copy of the selected index.
Columns Displays the list of columns the index is made of.
The list of columns contains the following column headings:
Name. Name of the column.
Position. Position of the column in the index.
Sort Order. Indicates whether the sort order is ascending or
descending.
Inactive. Indicates whether the column is active or inactive.
Databases Indicates whether an index is applicable only to a certain type of
database. If no database is indicated, the index will always be
created.
Table 26. Indices Subtabs
Tab Description
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
142 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
About the DAC Task Definitions Tab
The Task Definitions tab displays a list of tasks in the top pane. Table 27 provides a
description of the task properties displayed in the list.
Table 27. Task Definitions List Columns
Column Description
Name A logical, unique name for the task.
Command for
Incremental Load
A table can be loaded in Full Mode or Incremental Mode. Full Mode
refers to data loaded for the first time or data that is truncated and
then loaded. Incremental Mode refers to new or changed data being
added to the existing data.
The DAC maintains a last refresh timestamp whenever a table is
changed during the ETL process. (You can view this timestamp
under Design > Tables > Database Connections or Setup >
Database connections > Tables.) If a table has a timestamp, the
command appearing in this column is executed. If a table does not
have a timestamp, the command for a full load is executed. If the
execution type is Informatica, the workflow name is used as the
command.
Command for Full
Load
If a table has no last refresh timestamp, this command is executed.
Folder Name For execution type of Informatica only. The folder in which the
workflow resides.
Source DB Source database that is queried.
Target DB Target database that is populated.
Task Phase Task phase of the ETL process. The DAC server uses the task phase
to prioritize tasks and to generate a summary of the time taken for
each of the phases.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 143
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
Execution Type Tasks are executed based on their execution type. The following
types are supported:
Informatica. Task is invoked on an Informatica server using
pmcmd.
External Program. Task is an operable program on the
operating system where the DAC server is running. This
program can be a batch file, shell script, or any other program
that can be run like a bulk loader.
SQL File. Task is a SQL script in .xml or .sql format. For more
information, see Using SQL Files as an Execution Type in the
DAC on page 148.
Stored Procedures. Task is a stored procedure that has been
defined on the databases.
In addition, there are several internal execution types that you will
not be able to select when creating new tasks. These tasks are
categorized as either internal change capture tasks or internal data
warehouse tasks; all of these tasks are color-coded in pink in the
Task Definitions tab.
IMG_BUILD - internal change capture. If you are using multiple
Siebel transactional sources, you cannot change the behavior of
the change capture process. This task requires change capture
tables to be created on the other sources also. When adding
additional Siebel sources, go to Setup > Database Connections
and select the appropriate Siebel source, right-click and select
Change Capture Tasks. This action generates change capture
tasks. Use this same action to disable or delete change capture
tasks.
IMG_SYNC - internal change capture. If you are using multiple
Siebel transactional sources, you can create this task for the
additional tasks for doing similar change capture sync
processes. You cannot change the behavior of the change
capture sync process. This task requires change capture tables
to be created on the other sources also. This task should be
used with discretion for Siebel sources only.
Table 27. Task Definitions List Columns
Column Description
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
144 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Execution Type QUERY_INDEX - internal data warehouse. This task allows you
to alter when the Query indices are created. The DAC server
drops all indices before loading when the
CreateQueyIndexesAtTheEnd setting is set to True. When this
setting is set to False, all the indices, regardless of the index
type, get created as part of the task that does the loading.
UPDATE_ETL_PARAM - internal data warehouse. This task is
used for only to update W_PARAM_G from the DAC server. This
task populates the preferences to the W_PARAM_G table in the
Data Warehouse by querying values defined in the DAC
repository. Because only one Data Warehouse per DAC
repository is supported, this execution type should not be
chosen for any task.
Build Image Applicable for Siebel transactional sources only. When this check
box is selected, the change capture for the primary/auxiliary source
tables executes.
Truncate Always When this check box is selected, the target tables are truncated
regardless of whether a full or incremental load is occurring. Any
indices registered for this table are dropped before the command is
executed and are recreated after the command completes
successfully. When indices are dropped and created, the table is
analyzed so that the index statistics are up-to-date.
Truncate for Full
Load
When this check box is selected, the target tables are truncated
only when a full load is occurring. Any indices registered for this
table are dropped before the command is executed and are
recreated after the command completes successfully. When indices
are dropped and created, the table is analyzed so that the index
statistics are up-to-date. When the Truncate Always option is
selected, this option has no meaning.
Table 27. Task Definitions List Columns
Column Description
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 145
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
Table 28 provides a description of the tabs in the bottom pane.
Optional When one or more optional prerequisite tasks (Depends On tasks)
is run, the task is also included if this check box is selected.
Otherwise, the task is ignored.
For example, when table W_Person_F is loaded, W_Person_D is
also loaded. However, the task UpdateRecencyCat in Person
Dimension that writes to W_Person_D is optional. Only when the
tasks Load into OrderDimension or Load into OrderItemFact
(optional dependencies) are run does UpdateRecencyCat in Person
Dimension need to be executed. So, this optional task will not be
executed unless one or more of the tasks that it is depending on
optionally is chosen for execution.
Continue on Error When this check box is selected, if the command fails, the
dependent tasks are not stopped. However, if any auto-generated
tasks fail, the dependent tasks are stopped.
Inactive When this check box is selected, the record is inactive. Inactive
tasks do not participate in the ETL process.
Table 28. Task Definitions Subtabs
Tab Description
Edit Allows you to edit the table selected in the top pane.
Description Displays a description of the task selected in the top pane.
Table 27. Task Definitions List Columns
Column Description
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
146 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Source Tables Displays the list of tables used for getting data for the task selected
in the top pane.
The list contains the following column headings:
Name. Name of the table.
Primary. Indicates whether the table is a primary source of
data.
Auxiliary. Indicates whether the table is a secondary source of
data.
Note: If a table is marked as Primary or Auxiliary and the Build
Image property of the task is selected, the change capture process
is invoked. There are special tasks that force the base table data to
be extracted when data in auxiliary tables change.
A table can be neither Primary nor Auxiliary but still be used for
getting some attributes to populate a dimension or fact table. The
changes in these kinds of source tables are not reflected in the
dimension or fact table once the data is populated.
Target Tables Displays the list of tables where data is loaded for the task selected
in the top pane.
The list contains the following column headings:
Name. Name of the table.
Primary. Indicates whether the table is a primary target table.
For documentation purposes only.
Table 28. Task Definitions Subtabs
Tab Description
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 147
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
Actions Available
The following actions are available in the top pane toolbar and in the right-click
menu when the Task Definitions tab is active.
Copy Record
This command creates a copy of the selected task and also copies the references to
the tasks it depends on and source and target tables.
Depends On Tasks Displays a list of tasks that are prerequisite for the execution of the
task selected in the top pane. If any of the prerequisite tasks fail,
the task selected in the top pane will be marked as Stopped.
The list contains the following column headings:
Name. Name of the prerequisite task.
Task Type. Type of task (read only).
Optional Flag. When this flag is selected, the prerequisite task
optionally depends on the task selected in the top pane. For
example, task 1 loads table A, and task 2 loads table B and
optionally depends on task 1. If an execution plan requires both
tables A and B to be loaded, task 2 will wait for task 1 to
successfully complete. If an execution plan requires only table
B to be loaded, task 2 will be executed immediately, and task 1
will not be executed.
Dependent Tasks Displays a list of tasks that are dependent on the task selected in
the top pane. These tasks wait for the successful completion of the
current task before they are executed.
The list contains the following column headings:
Name. Name of the dependent task.
Task Type. Type of task (read only).
Optional Flag. See the description for Depends On Tasks.
Table 28. Task Definitions Subtabs
Tab Description
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
148 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Using SQL Files as an Execution Type in the DAC
There are two types of custom SQL files that can be executed through the DAC: XML
formatted .xml files, and plain text .sql files. For examples of XML and SQL files, go
to the DAC\CustomSQL folder.
XML Formatted Files
An XML file consists of a set of SQL statements for which the name, type, and
Continue on Fail option are defined using XML attributes. The set of SQL statements
is in a CDATA section which allows for special characters (like <, >, \) to be used
without breaking the XML structure. A CDATA section looks like the following:
<![CDATA[this is a place for a SQL statement]]>
An example of an XML file follows:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<CustomSQLs>
<sql name="Create Temp" type="SQL" continueOnFail="true">
<![CDATA[CREATE TABLE w_etl_temp (row_wid varchar(50))]]>
</sql>
<!-- This is how a comment section looks in XML -->
<!-- It will be ignored-->
<sql name="Update Temp" type="SQL">
<![CDATA[UPDATE w_etl_temp SET row_wid = 'qwe' WHERE row_wid LIKE
'5*']]>
</sql>
<sql name="Drop Temp" type="SQL">
<![CDATA[DROP TABLE w_etl_temp]]>
</sql>
</CustomSQLs>
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 149
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Design View
This example consists of three SQL statements: Create Temp, Update Temp, and
Drop Temp. These names will be used in DAC run task detail description to give
details of the errors encountered during execution (if any). In this particular
example all three statements are of type SQL. Regular update SQL statements and
the Stored Procedure type can also be used.
If the Continue on Fail option is set to True for a given statement, the execution will
continue even if the task fails. If the Continue on Fail option is set to False for a given
statement, or is omitted, the subsequent statements will not be executed and the
Task Run status will be Failed.
Plain Text SQL Files
Plain text SQL files consist of a set of SQL statements (no stored procedure calls).
The SQL statements are separated by a semicolon (;), and comment tags are allowed
(//, /* comment */, --). If any of the SQL statements fail, the Task Run status will
be Failed.
An example of a plain text SQL file follows:
CREATE TABLE w_etl_temp (name varchar(50))
;
UPDATE w_etl_temp
SET name = 'that''s right' //this line demonstrates the use of ' in
a text area
WHERE name LIKE 'gone fishing%';
/*
*some
*query
*statement
*/
SELECT * FROM w_etl_temp
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Setup View
150 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
;
DROP TABLE w_etl_temp
;
/*end of file*/
About the DAC Setup View
The Setup View provides access to functionality related to setting up DAC system
properties, Informatica servers, database connections, and email notification.
This section includes the following topics:
About the DAC System Properties Tab on page 150
About the DAC Informatica Servers Tab on page 150
About the DAC Database Connections Tab on page 151
About the DAC Email Recipients Tab on page 151
About the DAC System Properties Tab
The DAC System Properties tab allows you to configure various properties that
determine the behavior of the DAC server. The top pane displays a list of the
properties and their current values. For more information about the DAC system
properties, see Setting Up DAC System Properties and Resources on page 75.
About the DAC Informatica Servers Tab
The Informatica Servers Tab allows you to register one or more Informatica servers
and specify how many workflows can be executed in parallel on each server. The
DAC server automatically load balances across the servers. For more information
about Informatica server properties, see Registering Informatica Servers on
page 79.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 151
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Setup View
Actions Available
The following actions are available in the top pane toolbar and in the right-click
menu when the Informatica Servers tab is active.
Test Connection
This command allows you to test the connection to the database. You should use
this command on the machine where the DAC server is running.
Copy Record
This command creates a copy of the selected record.
About the DAC Database Connections Tab
This tab provides access to the database connection properties. The top pane
Indices tab displays a list of the properties and their current values. You can edit the
property values in the top pane by double-clicking in a cell. For more information
about database connection properties, see Creating Database Connections on
page 80.
Actions Available
The following actions are available in the top pane toolbar and in the right-click
menu when the Database Connections tab is active.
Test Connection
This command allows you to test the connection to the database. You should use
this command on the machine where the DAC server is running.
Change Capture Tasks
This command allows you to create, enable, or disable internal tasks for change
capture. Such tasks are needed only for connections of the Source type. Avoid
creating change capture tasks for non-Siebel sources.
About the DAC Email Recipients Tab
This tab allows you to set up a list of email addresses that will be notified about the
status of the ETL process. The top pane displays a list of the properties and their
current values. You can edit the property values in the top pane by double-clicking
in a cell. For more information about the Email Recipients properties, see
Configuring Email Recipients on page 82.
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Execute View
152 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Actions Available
The following actions are available in the top pane toolbar and in the right-click
menu when the Email Recipients tab is active.
Copy Record
This command creates a copy of the selected record.
About the DAC Execute View
The Execute View provides access to functionality that allows you to run, schedule,
and monitor execution plans.
This section includes the following topics:
About the DAC Execution Plans (Read Only) Tab on page 152
About the DAC Current Run Tab on page 152
About the DAC Run History Tab on page 156
About the DAC Scheduler Tab on page 156
About the DAC Validation Tab on page 158
About the DAC Execution Plans (Read Only) Tab
The Execution Plans tab in the Execute view displays, in read-only mode, the
available execution plans. This information is the same as that displayed in the
Execution Plans tab in the Design view. For more information, see About the DAC
Execution Plans Tab on page 130.
About the DAC Current Run Tab
This tab displays a list of queued, running, and failed current ETL processes in the
top pane. This list includes comprehensive information about each process.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 153
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Execute View
Table 29 provides a description of the information provided in the top pane.
NOTE: Once an ETL process completes, it is accessible from the Run History tab.
Table 29. Current Run Tab Columns
Column Description
Name Name of the ETL process
Execution Plan
Name
The execution plan whose run-time instance is this record. This
field is read only.
Process ID ID for the process. This value is an integer that is incremented by
1 for every run. This value is stored as ETL_PROC_WID in all the
Data Warehouse tables. This field is read only.
Run Status Status of the run. The possible values are the following:
Queued. A request has been submitted. Displayed in yellow in
the Current Run list.
Running. The server has picked up the run and starts
processing it. Displayed in blue.
Failed. One or more tasks has failed. Displayed in red.
Completed. All tasks have completed without errors. Displayed
in green.
Total Number of
Tasks
Total number of tasks for this run. This field is read only.
Number of Failed
Tasks
Sum total of tasks that have failed and that have stopped. This field
is read only.
Number of
Successful Tasks
Number of tasks whose status is completed. This field is read only.
Number of Tasks
Still in Queue
Number of tasks whose prerequisite tasks have not completed, and
the number of tasks whose prerequisite tasks are completed and
are waiting for resources. This field is read only.
Start Timestamp Start time of the ETL. Reflects the start time of every ETL attempt.
For example, if the ETL fails and is run again, it gets a new start
timestamp. The history of attempted runs is maintained in the
audit trail for the run. This field is read only.
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Execute View
154 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Table 30 provides a description of the tabs in the bottom pane.
End Timestamp End time of the ETL. Reflects the end time of every ETL attempt.
For example, if the ETL fails and is run again, it gets a new end
timestamp when the ETL is complete. The history of attempted
runs is maintained in the audit trail for the run. This field is read
only.
Duration A calculated field that shows the difference between start and end
time stamps.
Status Description Displays messages generated during run time. You can add notes to
this field for Completed runs.
Table 30. Current Run Subtabs
Tab Description
Edit Displays the status of the ETL selected in the top pane.
Description Provides a description of the ETL process, including status and
environment information. This description is updated at the
beginning of the ETL process and when the process is complete.
Table 29. Current Run Tab Columns
Column Description
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 155
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Execute View
Actions Available
The following actions are available in the top pane toolbar and in the right-click
menu when the Current Run tab is active.
Start
This command restarts the selected ETL, after the ETL has failed, stopped, or been aborted.
Abort
This command causes an ETL in progress to abort. All currently running tasks will be
aborted. The status of queued tasks and the ETL itself will change to Stopped.
Tasks Displays run-time instances of the tasks. As the execution proceeds,
the tasks are executed based on the dependency rules and some
prioritization.
As tasks complete, the tasks that depend on the completed tasks
are notified and once their dependencies are completed, they
become eligible to run. If a task fails, the administrator can address
the failure and then requeue the task or mark it as completed. The
DAC server polls for any changes in the failed tasks detail status.
If a failed task detail is queued, the task itself gets back into the
ready to run queue and all its dependent tasks get into the queued
status.
The rules of prioritization are as follows:
Tasks with no dependencies are executed first.
If a task has failed and has been requeued, it gets the maximum
priority.
Tasks with greater phase priorities are executed next. When
several tasks of the same phase are eligible to run, the tasks
with greater task priorities are executed next.
Summary (Read
Only)
Provides a summary (based on dynamic SQL) of the ETL selected
in the top pane. A start and end time for each phase is included.
Task Details Provides a execution details about each task associated with the
ETL selected in the top pane.
Audit Trail (Read
Only)
Provides the history of the ETL selected in the top pane.
Table 30. Current Run Subtabs
Tab Description
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Execute View
156 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Auto Refresh
This command allows you to turn on and off the automatic screen refresh functionality and
set the refresh interval.
Get Log File
This command fetches the log file for this run from the DAC server and saves it in the
ServerLog folder.
Mark as Completed
This command changes the status of a stopped or failed ETL to Completed. In the audit trail
for this ETL, the status is Marked as Completed. Use this command with caution; it can cause
the data warehouse to be inconsistent.
Analyze Run
This command saves a description of the run as an HTML file in the Log/Statistics folder.
About the DAC Run History Tab
The Run History tab displays information about completed ETL processes. The
information displayed in the top and bottom panes is the same as in the Current
Run tab. For a description of the information displayed in the Run History tab and
the actions available, see About the DAC Current Run Tab on page 152.
About the DAC Scheduler Tab
The Scheduler tab allows you to schedule ETL processes to be run either once at a
later time or periodically. When you schedule an ETL or make changes to a
schedule, the DAC server picks up the information from the DAC client. The DAC
server polls the DAC repository for changes periodically at a frequency set in the
DAC system properties. For information about DAC system properties, see Setting
Up DAC System Properties and Resources on page 75.
The top pane of the Scheduler tab lists ETL processes that have been scheduled. The
bottom pane allows you to schedule an ETL process.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 157
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Execute View
Table 31 provides a description of the information displayed in the top pane list.
Actions Available
The following actions are available in the top pane toolbar and in the right-click
menu when the Scheduler tab is active.
Copy Record
This command creates a copy of the selected record.
Scheduling an ETL
Use this procedure to schedule an ETL in the DAC.
1 In the DAC, navigate to the Scheduler tab.
The current list of schedules appears in the top pane.
2 Click New in the top pane toolbar.
The Edit tab in the bottom pane becomes active.
3 Enter a name for the schedule.
4 Select an execution plan.
5 If you want the schedule to run once, select the Run Only Once check box, and
then select a start and end date and time.
6 To create a periodic schedule, select a recurrence pattern, and enter the
appropriate date and time parameters.
7 Click Save.
Table 31. DAC Scheduler Tab List Columns
Column Description
Name User defined name of the schedule.
Execution Plan Execution plan scheduled.
Recurrence Indicates how often the schedule will be run.
Inactive Indicates whether the schedule is active or inactive.
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Execute View
158 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
About the DAC Validation Tab
The Validation tab allows you to view the results of a validation. The following
kinds of validation are available:
Resource Validation: Checks to see if the database connections are validated.
This will be checked as a first step of the ETL process. If the database
connections are not valid, the ETL will abort. This validation is also available on
the DAC client through Setup > Database Connections > Test Connection
functionality.
Table Validation: Checks to see if the tables do exist in the database. If the tables
do not exist, the ETL will fail. This is not checked during the ETL run. The check
also includes verifying the existence of image tables where applicable.
Index Validation checks the following:
a If all the columns in the index definition exist on the table in the database.
b If the index does exist in the database, the validation compares the index
definition and points out the differences.
c If there are multiple indices with the same definitions (columns in the same
order) for a table.
d If there are indices with the number of columns greater than 255.
e If '# Include columns' is greater than the number of columns provided in the
index column list.
f Checks to see if the index column has no columns.
g If the number of columns is more than 16. Some databases allow for more
than 16 columns. However, the user should inspect the warning and verify
its validity.
h If an index on a table was created on the database but not defined in the
repository. This may cause the ETL process to fail, because all the indices
need to be dropped prior to the load, otherwise the bulk loaders may fail.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 159
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Execute View
Informatica Workflow Validation: Verify for the task definitions of type
Informatica to match the 'Command for Full Load' and 'Command for
Incremental Load' do exist in the Informatica repository. For this validation to
work, configure the system preferences 'Main Informatica Repository' to point
to the database where the Informatica repository resides with the logical name
given to the database under Setup-> Database Connections.
Check for circular dependencies: While defining task dependencies, care should
be taken to not to define circular dependencies. For example task A depends on
task B, and task B depends on task C, and task C depends on task A. Such
occurrences will be identified. If these errors do exist, the ETL will fail.
DAC Functional Reference
About the DAC Execute View
160 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 161
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
5
This chapter describes concepts and techniques for customizing the Siebel Data
Warehouse. It also provides an overview of how incremental Siebel application
operational data is captured and how it can be used for adding columns and tables
to the Siebel Data Warehouse. It also describes customization techniques using
extension tables and Informatica mapping templates.
This information applies only to Siebel Analytics applications versions 7.7.
NOTE: Customization should be done only by those experienced in Informatica and
Siebel Analytics applications.
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Scenarios
In customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse, various scenarios are available to you
based on whether the data source is the Siebel OLTP database or data from a non-
Siebel source. The matrix in Figure 10 shows categories of customization scenarios.
The kinds of customizations available for each category are described in Table 32.
For instructions on how to perform the customizations, see Customization Steps
for Siebel Data on page 174 and Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for
Non-Siebel Data on page 180.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Scenarios
162 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
For detailed information about ETL processes and tables, see Siebel Data Warehouse
Data Model Reference.
Figure 10. Data Warehouse Customization Scenarios
Table 32. Types of Data Warehouse Customization Scenarios
Type Modification
Type 1 Add a column to the data warehouse from a primary source table
in the Siebel OLTP database
Using Siebel OLTP data, add a column to the data warehouse from
a related source table in the Siebel OLTP database
Using Siebel OLTP data, modify an existing column in the data
warehouse
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 163
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse ETL Process Concepts
Siebel Data Warehouse ETL Process Concepts
This section includes a detailed description of the ETL process. The following topics
are covered:
About Siebel Data Warehouse Extension Tables on page 164
About the Siebel Data Warehouse DATASRC_NUM_ID Column on page 166
Working with the Custom Folder of the Siebel Data Warehouse on page 166
Creating Custom Informatica Workflows on page 167
Important Notes About Siebel Data Warehouse Customizations on page 169
Type 2 Using Siebel OLTP data, add a new dimension table and use it with
an existing fact table
Using Siebel OLTP data, add a new fact table
Using Siebel OLTP data, add a new dimension table for a new fact
table
Type 3 Using non-Siebel data, add new data as a whole row into an
existing dimension table
Using non-Siebel data, add a column for an existing dimension
table
Using non-Siebel data, add a column for an existing fact table
Type 4 Using non-Siebel data, add a new dimension table
Using non-Siebel data, add a new dimension table and use it with
an existing fact table
Using non-Siebel data, add a new fact table
Table 32. Types of Data Warehouse Customization Scenarios
Type Modification
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse ETL Process Concepts
164 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
About Siebel Data Warehouse Extension Tables
The extension tables are provided with the Siebel Data Warehouse exclusively to
help customize the data warehouse tables.
CAUTION: Do not customize existing mappings or the database schema. If you need
to customize the standard mappings, create a new mapping that loads the extension
table instead.
For every extension table, there is an extension staging table that is populated by
the custom SDE process. The custom SIL process sources data from this staging
table and populates the final extension table. For information about how to use
extension tables, see Customization Steps for Siebel Data on page 174 and Siebel
Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data on page 180.
The extension tables have a 1:1 relationship with their corresponding dimension
and fact tables.
The data warehouse extension tables are different from the OLTP database
extension tables in the following ways:
Data warehouse extension tables are not maintained by Siebel Tools.
There is no relationship between data warehouse extension columns and the
corresponding OLTP extension columns. For example, attr01 in S_ORG_EXT_X
is not the same as attr01 in W_ORG_DX.
Mappings have to be implemented explicitly to populate the extension columns.
Using the Extension Tables
The extension tables have a 1:1 mapping between the dimension and fact records
to the extension records. To insert a record into a dimension or fact table, choose
the appropriate column and write a new mapping that uses the ETL servers
incremental logic to load the staging table. When populating data from the staging
table to the final dimension or fact tables using the INTEGRATION_ID and the
DATASRC_NUM_ID, find the primary key of the dimension table and use that as the
primary key of the extension table.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 165
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse ETL Process Concepts
Naming New Extension Tables
When you create a new extension table, use the same naming convention as is used
in the Siebel Data Warehouse by adding the prefix WC to the table name, for
example, WC_TABLENAME_DS. This will simply future upgrades to the Siebel Data
Warehouse.
NOTE: If a new table is created, you need to register the table and its indices in the
DAC repository. Also, if you modify indices on existing tables, you need to register
the indices.
Creating New Dimension or Fact Tables
You can create new tables using the same logic as is used for extension tables.
CAUTION: The data in any customized table will face upgrade issues.
If you are creating a new dimension or fact table, use the required system columns
that are part of each of the data warehouse tables to maintain consistency and the
ability to reference existing table structures. When you create a new table, you need
to register the tables and its indices in the DAC repository.
Required Columns
For main and extension staging tables the following columns are required:
INTEGRATION_ID. Stores the primary key or the unique identifier of a record as in
the source table.
DATASRC_NUM_ID. Stores the Data source from which the data is extracted. For
example, Siebel OLTP is 1.
For data from any external data source assign a number greater than 1.
For dimension and fact tables, the required columns are the INTEGRATION_ID and
DATASRC_NUM_ID columns as well as the following:
ROW_WID. A sequence number generated during the ETL process, which is used
as a unique identifier for the data warehouse.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse ETL Process Concepts
166 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
ETL_PROC_WID. Stores the ID of the ETL process information. The details of the
ETL process are stored in the S_ETL_RUN table on the OLTP side and
W_ETL_RUN_S table on the OLAP side. This is also the Process ID on Current
Run/Run History screen in the DAC.
The required columns for dimension and fact extension tables are ROW_WID and
ETL_PROC_WID.
About the Siebel Data Warehouse DATASRC_NUM_ID Column
All the tables in the Siebel Data Warehouse schema have DATASRC_NUM_ID as part
of their unique user key. This means that the rows can be loaded in the same data
warehouse tables from different sources if this column is given a different value for
each data source.
NOTE: The DATASRC_NUM_ID value of 1 is reserved for the main Siebel data source
and cannot be used for other sources.
Working with the Custom Folder of the Siebel Data Warehouse
The Siebel Data Warehouse provides a folder within the repository specifically
designed for customized changes to an implementation. This folder is named
CUSTOM_DW_REP. Using the Informatica Designer, make modifications only in the
CUSTOM_DW_REP folder.
Do not change objects in the SIEBEL_DW_REP folder unless it is explicitly
mentioned. This folder may be overwritten in future upgrades. All changes should
be placed in the CUSTOM_DW_REP folder within the Informatica Designer.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 167
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse ETL Process Concepts
The easiest way to modify an object is to copy an existing object from
SIEBEL_DW_REP into CUSTOM_DW_REP and to reuse existing business
components, source and target definitions, transformations, mapplets, and
mappings before you make any changes.
NOTE: If source tables are extended (after copying into the CUSTOM_DW_REP
folder), then the source tables require manual editing in the Informatica Designer.
Do not import the tables from the database, because it changes the source table
definitions for the entire Siebel Data Warehouse.
When importing new tables from the database into the CUSTOM_DW_REP folder,
use the Siebel Data Warehouse and Siebel Transaction Database ODBC database
connections to connect to the source and target databases.
After importing new table definitions, change the database type to Oracle in the
Informatica repository, regardless of the database platform you are using. This has
no effect on the choice of a relational database. This step is very important because
in Informatica if the database type of the source tables are not identical, all
mappings and workflows that refer to the source tables will be invalid.
Creating Custom Informatica Workflows
You must create custom workflows for all customized mappings. The general
requirements for creating custom workflows are as follows:
Create the workflow such that each loads only one table. This helps to integrate
the workflow with the DAC.
The workflow name should match a session name that is used inside the
workflow. This helps the DAC to collect certain statistics.
Fail parent if this task fails should be checked for all the sessions within a
workflow.
Fail parent if this task does not run should be checked for all the sessions within
a workflow.
The Stop on Errors parameter should be set to 1 for all sessions with a workflow.
This parameter is located in the Error Handling area of the Config Object tab in
Informatica Designer.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse ETL Process Concepts
168 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Set the appropriate source and target connection values in Informatica Designer.
If the workflow is going to be used for full load command, you can choose to
load in bulk mode (applicable only to Oracle and DB2-UDB databases). If the
workflow is going to be used for the full load command in the DAC, then in the
Properties tab of Informatica Designer, set the Target Load type to Bulk. This
requires that the target table does not have any indices during the load. The DAC
will drop the indices automatically; no action is required on your part.
For all entities, such as dimension and fact tables, create two workflows, one to
be used for a full load and the other to be used for an incremental load. This
provides an opportunity to tune each of these load scenarios.
If the workflow is designed for loading a dimension in a full mode, make sure
the workflow also includes a session for the unspecified row creation.
You can decide to truncate the target table in the workflow, but it is necessary
that while defining a task in the DAC, you choose appropriate truncate option.
This helps the DAC to decide whether to drop and create indices on the table.
If some sessions have to be run in serial order and if all the sessions need to be
rerun upon failure of the workflow, then you should consider designing a single
workflow that has sessions run in serial. If upon failure, not all of the sessions
need to be run again, then consider designing separate workflows and define
dependencies in the DAC.
Use views created by the DAC as the main source table in all extract processes.
If a workflow uses a list of values, make it depend on the Fix List Of Values and
Copy to OLTP task definition in the DAC.
If a workflow uses exchange rates, make it depend on the Extract for ExchRate
task definition in the DAC.
If a workflow uses cost lists, make it depend on the Load Cost Lists task
definition in the DAC.
You can import the workflows into the DAC repository's temporary area while
defining tasks.
Customization Categories
There are three categories of customizations:
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 169
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse ETL Process Concepts
Customizing preconfigured workflows. Copy the mapping from the Siebel_DW_Rep
folder into the Custom folder. Modify it as necessary. Create new workflows in
the Custom folder. In the DAC, search for the task that executes the workflow
and change the folder to the Custom folder. Update the command for full and
incremental loads appropriately if the workflow names have been changed.
Creating new workflows to populate additional custom entities. The custom
workflows can be plugged into an ETL process by registering them in the DAC.
A new task needs to be registered in the DAC, with the appropriate properties
set. Also, you must define source and target tables, task definitions, and
dependencies. In the Depends On Tasks tab, select the list of tasks that are
prerequisite for the current task to execute. In the Dependent Tasks tab, define
the tasks that need to wait for the successful completion of this task. Set the
Optional flag to True.
Pruning preconfigured ETL processes. Pruning is the process in which you modify
a preconfigured execution plan to meet your needs. You can prune an execution
plan by using the DAC to inactivate certain components of the execution plan,
such as subject areas, table groups, tables, tasks, and dependencies. Inactivating
the component means the component does not participate in the ETL process
when the execution plan is run. For more information about pruning, see
Handling ETL Failures with the DAC on page 125.
Important Notes About Siebel Data Warehouse Customizations
All custom work, unless stated otherwise, must be done in the Custom folder so that
the custom work can be preserved during an Informatica repository upgrade. Doing
work on the standard folder should be avoided whenever possible. Whenever
custom work is done in the standard folder, a careful note of the custom work
should be recorded so that the customizations can be reapplied whenever the
Informatica repository is upgraded. An upgrade of the Informatica repository
overrides any changes to the standard folder.
Additional Customization Instructions
Table definitions in Informatica. Make sure that the SQL style is set to Oracle while
importing the table definitions from external data sources. Even if the actual
data source is of another database type, such as DB2 or MSSQL, it does not affect
the logic of how data gets loaded.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse ETL Process Concepts
170 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Update strategy. For loading new fact and dimension tables or loading data into
the existing tables, design a custom process on the source side to detect the new
and modified records. The SDE process should be designed to load only the
changed data (new and modified). If the data is loaded without the incremental
process, the data that was previously loaded will be updated again, which is a
costly process. For example, the logic in the OTB SIL mappings looks up the
destination tables based on the INTEGRATION_ID and DATASRC_NUM_ID and
returns the ROW_WID if the combination exists, in which case it updates the
record. If the lookup returns null, it inserts the record instead.
ETL process. When using multiple sources for the data warehouse, you can
decide to load from all of them at the same time or at different time frequencies
using different execution plans.
Truncating target tables. Truncating should be done through the DAC. A single
task has place holders for a full load, and one for an incremental load.
For the SDE workflows, the commands for full load and incremental load are
the same. They should have Truncate Always flag checked. For these kinds
of tasks, the command for full load and incremental load are based on the
same mapping.
For SIL workflows, the command can be different for full and incremental
loads. They should have the Truncate For Full Load option checked. When a
table gets truncated, the indexes are automatically dropped and created after
the data is loaded. And so, the workflow for full load command can have the
Bulk Load option turned on, and, therefore, you can have an optimized
version of the mapping that does not need to look up for finding if a record
needs to be inserted or updated.
Auxiliary tasks need to be run only during incremental mode. So, for these
tasks, the full load command is empty. No truncate options should be set.
SDE Sessions SIL Sessions Aux Sessions
Truncate Option
Truncate Always Truncate for Full
Load
None
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 171
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse ETL Process Concepts
ETL_PROC_WID. Use the same ETL_PROC_WID in W_PARAM_G table in custom
mappings. ETL_PROC_WID is a reference key to Run History in the DAC. To use
the same ETL_PROC_WID, copy the reusable lookup (called
LKP_ETL_PROC_WID) defined in the Siebel_DW_Rep folder. The input to the
lookup is a constant (hard coded to 1).
DATASRC_NUM_ID. Even though preconfigured mappings look up W_PARAM_G
for getting this value, for customizations that move data from other sources, you
should hard code the value with a number other than 1, which is reserved for
the main Siebel transaction database in custom mappings.
Creating indexes and naming conventions. Staging tables typically do not require
any indexes. Use care to determine if indexes are required on staging tables.
Create indexes on all the columns that the ETL will use for dimensions and facts
(for example, ROW_WIDs of Dimensions and Facts, INTEGRATION_ID and
DATASRC_NUM_ID, and flags). Carefully consider which columns or
combination of columns filter conditions should exist, and define indexes to
improve query performance. Inspect the OTB objects for guidance. Name all the
newly created tables as WC_. This helps visually isolate the new tables from the
OTB tables. Keep good documentation of the customizations done; this helps
when upgrading your data warehouse. Once the indexes are decided upon, they
should be registered in the DAC, either manually or by right-clicking on the
certain table and invoking the Import Indices command.
Currency. For currency-related data, populate the table with the base currency
and exchange date field (in order to convert the data appropriately). The data
for currency conversion should be maintained in the main Siebel data source.
(The currency data is maintained by converting all the currency information into
a single Base Currency code specified in the DACs ETL preferences.)
Day Dimension. For the data that is related to W_DAY_D, use the reusable
transformation EXP_DAY_DIMENSION_FK_RESOLUTION. Note that this
transformation will take a date as input and return the foreign key to the Day
dimension as output in the appropriate format (YYYYMMDD). Copy the
reusable transformation and use it.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Standard Templates for Siebel Data Warehouse Customizations
172 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
List Of Values. This applies in particular to Type 1 and 2. The preconfigured
columns that depend on a list of values have a language-dependent column and
language-independent column. Use the mapplet MPLT_LOV_TRANSLATION to
populate the language-dependent and independent columns in the dimension
tables. For fact tables, use MPLT_LOV_D_ROW_WID to create a new foreign key
to the LOV dimension. One could also deal with translations directly in SQL
overrides to improve performance.
Standard Templates for Siebel Data Warehouse
Customizations
This section describes the standard templates.
CustomTemplateSDE_PersonDimension
Using the SDE mapping, the ATTRIB_02 column of the extension stage table
(W_PERSON_DSX) is populated with the value from S_CONTACT.RACE source
column. This is a straightforward mapping. The different transformations are the
following:
SQ_S_CONTACT. The SQL in the SQL override section contains the link to the
view created by the DAC so that only the incremental data is captured.
EXPTRANS. The lookup (LKP_DATASOURCE_NUM_ID) obtains the
DATASOURCE_NUM_ID from the W_PARAM_G table. The W_PARAM_G is
populated in the beginning of the ETL by the DAC. Note that all the system
columns are populated in addition to the attrib column. The ATTRIB_01 column
is populated with the string Contact, because the combination of
INTEGRATION_ID, DATASOURCE_NUM_ID, and CONTACT_TYPE is used to
look up the ROW_WID value. In most of the dimensions, only the
INTEGRATION_ID and DATASOURCE_NUM_ID values are used for this purpose.
CustomTemplateSIL_WaveDimension
Using the SIL mapping, the ATTRIB_02 column of the final extension table is
populated with the person dimension (W_WAVE_DX). The different
transformations are the following:
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 173
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Fact Templates for Siebel Data Warehouse Customizations
SQ_W_WAVE_DSX. There is no SQL in the override. It is a straight query from
W_PERSON_DSX table that has been populated with incremental rows.
LKP_W_WAVE_D. Looks up the W_WAVE_D table to get the ROW_WID for the
row.
LKP_W_WAVE_DX. Looks up the target table to find out whether to insert or
update the row. This information is used by the update strategy.
EXPTRANS. Used to get the Insert/Update flag and ETL_PROC_WID by using the
lookup LKP_ETL_PROC_WID from the W_PARAM_G table. This table is
populated in the beginning of the Refresh Siebel DW session.
FILTRANS. Passing only those rows that have entry in the parent dimension table.
UPDTRANS. Insert or updates a row based on the flag.
Fact Templates for Siebel Data Warehouse
Customizations
This template shows how to attach an existing dimension (account dimension) to
a fact (asset fact).
CustomTemplateSDE_AssetFact
Using this SDE mapping, the staging extension table for the Asset fact is populated
with incremental data. The different transformations are the following:
SQ_S_ASSET. Selects the OWNER_ACCNT_ID that will ultimately be used to join
with the account dimension in the fact. Note the extra where clause joining to
the incremental image table.
EXPTRANS. Gets DATASOURCE_NUM_ID using lookup
LKP_DATA_SOURCE_NUM_ID from table W_PARAM_G. This table is populated
in the beginning of the session by the DAC server.
Finally, the FK_01_ID field of the extension stage table W_ASSET_FSX is populated.
All the system columns are also populated.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Customization Steps for Siebel Data
174 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
CustomTemplateSIL_AssetFact
This SIL map is used to populate the final extension table for the Asset fact. The
different transformations are the following:
SQ_W_ASSET_FSX. Note the SQL in the override. This joins with the dimension
table W_ACCOUNT_D to get the ROW_WID of the dimension row to be
populated in the foreign key id column of the extension table.
LKP_W_ASSET_F. Retrieves the ROW_WID of the parent fact table W_ASSET_F.
LKP_W_ASSET_FX. Gets the Insert/Update flag that is used by the update strategy
to find out whether to insert or update this row.
EXPTRANS. Gets ETL_PROC_WID using the lookup LKP_ETL_PROC_WID from
table W_PARAM_G. This table gets populated in the beginning of Refresh Siebel
DW. Also generates Insert/Update flag based on the previous transform
LKP_W_ASSET_FSX.
UPDTRAN. Updates or inserts a row based on the flag.
Customization Steps for Siebel Data
This section includes information about adding columns and tables to the Siebel
Data Warehouse using data from the Siebel OLTP. It includes the following topics:
Adding a Column From a Main Source Table in the Siebel OLTP on page 175
Adding a Column From a Related Source Table in the Siebel OLTP on page 175
Modifying an Existing Column in the Siebel Data Warehouse on page 177
Adding a New Dimension in the Siebel Data Warehouse and Using It with an
Existing Fact on page 177
Adding a New Fact Table in the Siebel Data Warehouse on page 179
Adding a New Dimension Table for a New Fact Table in the Siebel Data
Warehouse on page 180
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 175
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Customization Steps for Siebel Data
Adding a Column From a Main Source Table in the Siebel OLTP
Example:
Adding race in W_PERSON_D because it is not in the supplied model. The value
of race is sourced from S_CONTACT, which is already the main source table for
W_PERSON_D.
Adding measure XYZ in W_ORDERITEM_F because it is not in the supplied
model. The value of XYZ comes from S_ORDERITEM, which is the main source
table for W_ORDERITEM_F.
To add a column from a main source table in the Siebel OLTP
1 Choose one of the following options:
Use predefined columns in an existing extension table.
Create a new extension table with appropriate columns.
2 Create a new map (SDE and SIL) to load the extension table column, based on
the provided templates (CustomTemplateSDE_PersonDimension).
3 Create new individual workflows for the new mappings in the Custom folder.
4 For extract mappings (SDE), use views as the main source of information.
5 Create new tasks in the DAC repository, one for SDE and the other for SIL.
6 Make the SDE task depend on any auxiliary workflows, so that it waits for all
the auxiliary processing for the base table to complete.
7 For the CustomSIL mapping make SDE mapping and the SIL_PersonDimension
as the Depends On tasks. This is because you cannot execute CustomSIL
workflow until the CustomExtract is completed. Also, because the primary key
lookup has to be performed, this task needs to wait on SIL_PersonDimension.
Adding a Column From a Related Source Table in the Siebel OLTP
Adding ABC in W_PERSON_D because it is not in the supplied model. The value
of ABC is sourced from S_CONTACT_X, which is not the main source table for
W_PERSON_D.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Customization Steps for Siebel Data
176 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Adding measure XYZ in W_ORDERITEM_F because it is not in the supplied
model. The value of XYZ comes from S_DOC_ORDER, which is not the main
source table for W_ORDERITEM_F.
To add a column from a related source table in the Siebel OLTP
1 Choose one of the following options:
Use predefined columns in an existing extension table
Create a new extension table with appropriate columns.
2 Create new mappings and workflows (SDE and SIL) to load the extension table
column based on the provided templates. The related table should be joined in
the Source Qualifier's SQL. Even though additional information is being
extracted from a related table in the SQL override, always use the view created
on the base table to extract information.
3 If necessary (for the new table), write the auxiliary change capture mappings so
that whenever a row changes in the source table for the new column, the
corresponding row in the main table is also marked changed, by inserting rows
in the Incremental Row Image table.
4 Create a new workflow for the new map and register the task in the DAC
repository. Create the dependencies.
5 Verify if the related table is registered in the DAC. If an entry is not there, you
need to create a new record for the table and assign it an image suffix. If the table
is registered, make sure there is an image suffix assigned for this table.
6 If an image suffix does not exist for the table under consideration, assign one.
The image suffix should be three characters long. The recommended naming
convention is to start with C. For example, use C1, C2, CA1, CA2, and so on.
Make sure this suffix is not used by other tables. The DAC client does not
validate this information when entering data.
7 Create Image tables in the OLTP. Right-click on the table record in the DAC
client, and choose Generate Change Capture Scripts. This will assist you with
creating the image tables, necessary indices, and triggers if you plan on tracking
deletes on the OLTP database. Execute these scripts on the OLTP.
8 For the task that is created for the extract process set the Build Image flag to True
and select the new table as an auxiliary table.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 177
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Customization Steps for Siebel Data
Modifying an Existing Column in the Siebel Data Warehouse
Modifying Full Name in W_PERSON_D with a name in a different format.
Modifying Tax Total and XYZ in W_ORDERITEM_F with different tax calculation
logic.
To modify an existing column in the data warehouse
1 Do not modify the existing column.
2 Use extension table columns for the new value.
3 Refer to the steps for adding an extra column.
Adding a New Dimension in the Siebel Data Warehouse and Using It with
an Existing Fact
Adding a new custom dimension WC_NEWDIM_D and linking it to W_REVN_F.
Reference:
SDE and SIL_WaveDimension, SDE and SIL_AssetFact
To add a new dimension and use it with an existing fact table
1 Create a DDL for the new dimension based on the standard structure (with
appropriate system columns). Create a staging table for this dimension.
2 Register the new source table (if it does not already exist) in the DAC repository
and associate it with the appropriate database connection.
3 Assign it an image suffix if you plan on incrementally loading this table.
4 Create a new custom map SDE_XYZ to populate the dimension stage. Instead of
the actual source table (for example S_ABC), use the view that will be generated
by the change capture process (for example V_ABC) in the SQL so that it extracts
only the incremental data. Use existing reference maps as examples of how to
populate the system columns. Make sure you truncate the stage table in
corresponding tasks.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Customization Steps for Siebel Data
178 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
5 Create a new custom map SIL_XYZ to populate the new dimension from the
stage table. Use the above referenced map as example for how to populate the
system columns.
6 Make the following changes to fact loading mapping to link the new dimension:
a Do one of the following:
Use the extension table's predefined fact table foreign keys that join to this
new dimension. (In the above example, the extension table for W_REVN_F
must be used to store the foreign key of this new dimension.)
Create a new extension table for the fact table with predefined structure to
hold a new foreign key, if the foreign keys in existing the extension table have
been exhausted.
b Create new mappings (SDE and SIL) to populate the extension table columns
of the fact extension table.
7 Register the new dimension table in the DAC and associate it with the
appropriate database connection.
If you are planning to build a new dimension incrementally, assign an image
suffix to the source table. For instructions, see Adding a Column From a Related
Source Table in the Siebel OLTP on page 175.
8 Add the new dimension to all the fact groups that may reference it.
9 Register the workflows as tasks in the DAC.
10 For SDE mapping of the dimension make sure you set the Build Image flag to
True, and the Truncate Always option to True. And in the list of source tables,
mark the primary/auxiliary source(s) of this dimension.
11 For SIL workflows of the dimension make sure you set only Truncate for Full
Load option to True.
12 Make SIL_XYZ depend on SDE_XYZ.
13 Make CustomSIL_RevenueFact depend on load dimension task (SIL_XYZ) and
load base fact task (SIL_RevenueFact).
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 179
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Customization Steps for Siebel Data
Adding a New Fact Table in the Siebel Data Warehouse
Creating a new custom WC_PROJECT_F by sourcing data from S_XYZ table.
Reference:
SDE and SIL_AssetFact.
To add a new fact table
1 Create a DDL for the new fact based on the standard structure (with appropriate
system columns). Create a staging table for this fact.
2 Register the new source table (if it does not already exist) in the DAC repository
and associate it with a database connection.
3 Assign it an image suffix.
4 Create the change capture tables by right-clicking and selecting Generate Change
Capture Scripts.
5 Create SDE mappings to populate the custom stage table. Use the view created
by change capture as the main table in the SQL so that it extracts only the
incremental data. Use the reference maps (above) as examples of how to
populate the system columns. Be sure to truncate the stage table in
corresponding workflows.
6 Create SIL mapping to populate the custom fact table. Use reference maps as
examples of how to populate the system columns.
7 Use lookups or SQL override joins to dimension tables for populating dimension
foreign keys (ROW_WIDs) pointing to the existing dimension.
8 In the DAC, register the target tables.
9 Because this is a fact table, create a new table group with this fact table as the
main table.
10 Associate the fact table to the group with the relationship as Self.
11 Associate all the dimension tables.
12 Add the newly created group to the appropriate subject area.
13 Create new tasks for the workflows.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
180 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
14 For the SDE task, make sure you have the Build Image flag set to True, and list
all the source tables that it queries from. Choose one or more tables as primary
or auxiliary. For the target tables choose the staging table. Set the Truncate
Always flag to True.
15 For the SIL task, list all the dimensions that will be required under source tables,
and make it depend on the SDE task of the custom fact table and SIL tasks of all
the dimension tables.
Adding a New Dimension Table for a New Fact Table in the Siebel Data
Warehouse
Adding a new custom dimension WC_NEWDIM_D and linking it to new custom
WC_BKLOG_F fact table.
To add a new dimension table for a new fact table
The steps for creating a new dimension table are similar to the steps for incremental
change capture.
1 In the new custom fact loading mapping (SIL), use lookups for getting foreign
keys to the new dimension.
2 Use existing maps as examples.
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-
Siebel Data
This section includes information about adding non-Siebel data to the data
warehouse. It includes the following topics:
Adding New Data as a Whole Row into the Standard Dimension Table in Siebel
Data Warehouse on page 181
Adding New Data as a Whole Row into the Standard Fact Table in Siebel Data
Warehouse on page 184
Adding a Column in a Standard Dimension Table in Siebel Data Warehouse on
page 189
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 181
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
Adding a Column for a Standard Fact Table in Siebel Data Warehouse on
page 191
Building a Custom Dimension Table from External Sources in Siebel Data
Warehouse on page 192
Linking the Custom Dimension to a Standard Fact Table in Siebel Data
Warehouse on page 193
Building Custom Fact Tables from External Sources in Siebel Data Warehouse
on page 194
Adding New Data as a Whole Row into the Standard Dimension Table in
Siebel Data Warehouse
Example: Loading Contact Data From an External Source
New DDLs: None
New Mappings: SDE Mappings for dimensions, SDE and SIL mappings for
related fact tables
Case: Bringing data into dimension tables
Reference Mappings: SDE and SIL_WaveDimension mappings
To add new data as a whole row into the standard dimension table
1 Identify and understand the existing structure of staging tables. Refer to Siebel
Data Warehouse Data Model Reference for the table structure. Non-system
columns can include the null value.
2 Create a custom SDE mapping to load the data into the staging table in the
Custom_DW_Folder for this purpose. The staging table needs to be populated
with incremental data (rows that have been added or changed since the last
Refresh ETL process), for performance reasons.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
182 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
3 Populate the INTEGRATION_ID column with the unique identifier for the record.
The combination of INTEGRATION_ID and DATASRC_NUM_ID is unique. When
importing the data, make sure that a unique identifier for the external data
source is inserted in the DATASRC_NUM_ID column. The DATASRC_NUM_ID is
set to 1 for mappings that source data from the Siebel OLTP. This is a reserved
value and is used in all standard mappings. For example, a value of 2 can be
defined for DATASRC_NUM_ID in the custom SDE mapping. The standard SDE
mappings populate the INTEGRATION_ID column of the dimension staging
table (used for resolving the dimension's Siebel OLTP ROW_ID value). The
custom process must be used to populate the same column with a unique
identifier from the external data source.
4 After the data is populated in the staging table, use the standard SIL mappings
to populate the dimension target tables.
5 Use one data source per dimension.
This is a best practice. To consolidate data for a dimension row from multiple
data sources, complete that process prior to the custom SDE mapping process.
For example, to consolidate contacts from Siebel and Peoplesoft applications,
complete the consolidation process (including removing duplicates, cleansing,
and so on) before loading the contact list into the Siebel staging table.
6 Modify the SDE and SIL mappings of all the related fact tables (fact tables that
need to be linked to this dimension).
The custom fact SDE mappings must populate the foreign key column of the
changed dimension (using a custom map table process to convert from Siebel's
row IDs to the external data source row IDs). The custom SIL mapping should
be modified to use the appropriate DATASRC_NUM_ID, because the standard SIL
mappings assume DATASRC_NUM_ID for the dimensions are the same as the
fact tables DATASRC_NUM_ID.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 183
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
7 It is very important to decide when the data is going to be loaded. If it is going
to be loaded along with the Siebel source data, you must be careful with how
you handle failure recovery. The preconfigured workflows truncate the target
staging table prior to loading. Upon failure, when the DAC server restarts the
task, all the data is truncated and all the data is loaded again.
If the data from the external source gets loaded into the same staging table, be
careful with how you handle this situation, since you cannot use the truncate
table functionality. The data migrating into the staging table is not incrementally
loaded, and, therefore, should be cleaned up prior to attempting to load this
table again.
In such a case, it is recommended that you encapsulate the extract part from
both the sources inside an Informatica workflow. Upon failure of either of the
extracts, the whole workflow gets rerun. Note that the data from both the
sources should be run at the same time, all the time.
If it is decided that the data is going to be loaded at different time frequencies,
then the new SDE workflows need not depend on the preconfigured SDE
workflows and can use the Truncate Table option for failure recovery. In this
case, in the DAC Design view, define a new execution plan in the Execution
Plans tab, and define the new data source in the Database Connections subtab.
Make sure the shared SIL process depends on the SDE processes from both
sources.
Figure 11 provides a graphical representation of this process.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
184 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Adding New Data as a Whole Row into the Standard Fact Table in Siebel
Data Warehouse
Example: Bringing in activity data from external sources.
New DDLs: None
New Mappings: SDE and SIL mappings
Case: Bringing data into fact tables.
Reference: SDE and SIL_AssetFact
Figure 11. Adding New Data as a Whole Row into the Standard Dimension Table
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 185
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
To add new data as a whole row into a standard fact table
1 Identify and understand the existing structure of staging tables. Refer to Siebel
Data Warehouse Data Model Reference for the table structure.
Fact tables contain foreign keys to existing dimension tables. These dimensional
key columns in the fact table need to be populated with the correct ROW_WID
values from the dimension tables. For dimensions that are populated with Siebel
data, identify the correct ROW_WID by looking up the INTEGRATION_ID in the
dimension table. For example, to load Order Item details from SAP, the Order
Item Fact staging table has the PROD_ID column that needs to be resolved from
the main Siebel data source. Looking up the ROW_WID of the S_PROD_INT
table later resolves the foreign key to product dimension.
2 Develop custom SIL mappings to handle the specific situation required. The
reference SIL mapping can be copied to the Custom folder and customized for
specific requirements. If the SIL mappings were copied as a base from the
standard folder, it is possible to leverage the existing logic for ROW_WID
generation, update strategy, and so on. It may be easier to trim an existing SIL
mapping than to create a new one. Apply discretion in creating a custom SIL
mapping.
3 While joining with the dimensions in the SIL process, use the
DATASOURCE_NUM_ID and INTEGRATION_ID to resolve foreign key values.
Note that for dimensions populated entirely from Siebel,
DATASOURCE_NUM_ID will be 1.
4 For the dimensions populated entirely from other external sources, use the
appropriate DATASRC_NUM_ID (not 1) and the corresponding
INTEGRATION_ID. This needs to be hard coded in the custom mapping.
5 Use an update strategy that would update the existing records and insert new
ones. Inspect SDE and SIL mappings provided as reference to understanding the
programmatic logic.
Scenario 1. All the dimensions get data from the external source as the fact
table. In this case it is not necessary to change the existing standard SIL
mappings. The standard SIL process assumes that the dimension rows that a
fact needs to join are from the same data source as the fact rows. (See
Figure 12 for an example.)
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
186 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Scenario 2: Some dimensions are populated from external sources and some
from the Siebel OLTP. In this case, standard SIL mappings need to be
modified so that the appropriate DATASRC_NUM_ID is used when joining to
a dimension table. This scenario needs to be custom designed and
developed. As in any customization, it will require ongoing maintenance.
(See Figure 13 for an example.) Copy the mapping over to the Custom folder
and do the modifications. Create a workflow that points to the mapping in
the Custom folder. In the DAC repository, search for the task that uses this
workflow as a command and change the folder to Custom folder. Change the
name as necessary.
NOTE: Changing the standard mapping is an exception. It is important to document
changes as updates to standard mapping will be lost during the Informatica
repository process. Reapply changes to the standard mappings after the upgrade
process. Prior to modifying copy the mapping as-is from OTB folder to the Custom
folder, and make changes in the Custom folder. In the DAC repository, find the task
that is using the workflow name and change the folder to point to the Custom folder.
Adding new data as a whole row into the standard Fact table: Scenario 1.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 187
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
Figure 12. Adding New Data as a Whole Row into the Standard Fact Table - Scenario 1
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
188 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Figure 13. Adding New Data as a Whole Row into the Standard Fact Table - Scenario 2
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 189
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
In the Figure 13 because the contact data and product data are from different data
sources, it is necessary to modify the SIL session and the SQL override in the
following manner:
SELECT
ACT.INTEGRATION_ID,
P.ROW_WID,
C.ROW_WID
FROM
W_ACTIVITY_FS ACT,
W_CONTACT_D C,
W_PRODUCT_D P
WHERE
ACT.PRODUCT_ID = P.INTEGRATION_ID
AND P.DATASRC_NUM_ID = 1 /* Product is from Siebel Source having
datasrc_num_id = 1
ln dimension */
AND ACT.CONTACT_ID = C.INTEGRATION_ID
AND ACT.DATASRC_NUM_ID = C.DATASRC_NUM_ID
/* The rows in Contact dimension that the fact refer to are from
the same external datasrc, 2 */
Adding a Column in a Standard Dimension Table in Siebel Data
Warehouse
Example: Loading an attribute called SKU for existing products that have already
been loaded.
New DDLs: New extension tables or preconfigured extension tables
New Mappings: SDE and SIL mappings for extension tables
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
190 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Case: Bringing data in for dimension tables
Reference: CustomTemplateSDE and SIL_WaveDimension in
Custom_DW_Folder
To add a column in a standard dimension table
1 Add a column either in the standard or custom extension tables. There should
be a 1:1 relationship with the parent table. Do not modify the standard tables,
because doing so will affect upgrades.
2 The custom stage table should be populated with incremental data. This is an
important performance consideration. It requires a process on the source side
that detects new or modified records. This allows custom SDE mappings to
process incremental data during each Refresh ETL execution.
3 While populating the extension table, design lookups (or write SQL overrides)
for the SQL Qualifier Transformation in the Informatica mapping to identify the
primary key (ROW_WID) of the parent row for the additional attribute. The
primary key (ROW_WID) of the parent row is then used as the primary key
(ROW_WID) of the extension table. Template mappings are provided in the
CUSTOM_DW_REP folder (for example,
CustomTemplateSDE_WaveDimension').
4 The custom SDE mappings should populate the stage extension tables (standard
or custom). The custom extension table for staging should include the
INTEGRATION_ID and DATASRC_NUM_ID. This combination enables the
unique identification for each row by the data source. The data for this
INTEGRATION_ID column should be populated by a process that identifies such
an ID from the parent data source. The DATASRC_NUM_ID column should have
the same value of the DATASRC_NUM_ID of the parent it is extending.
5 Once stage data is populated, a custom SIL mapping can be developed to move
data from the extension stage to the extension table (of either the factor
dimension table). The process should contain a look up either based on the
INTEGRATION_ID and DATASRC_NUM_ID to find the ROW_WID for the
extension table from the parent fact/dimension table. For an example, refer to
CustomTemplateSIL_WaveDimension.
6 If there are rows for which there is no matching ROW_WID in the parent tables,
they should be ignored. Use the appropriate update strategy for modifying
existing data.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 191
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
7 Make the custom SIL process depend on the custom SDE process and SIL process
of the dimension table you are extending, because this mapping will require the
borrowing of the foreign key for the link.
Figure 14 provides an example of a product dimension that already exists and the
addition of the attribute SKU.
Adding a Column for a Standard Fact Table in Siebel Data Warehouse
Example: Loading shipping order information into the data warehouse.
New DDLs: Custom or standard extension tables.
Figure 14. Adding a Column in a Standard Dimension Table
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
192 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
New Mappings: SDE and SIL mappings.
Case: Bringing data in for fact tables.
Reference: CustomSDE and SIL_AssetFact in Custom_DW_Folder.
To add a column for a standard fact table
1 Follow the steps in Adding a Column in a Standard Dimension Table in Siebel
Data Warehouse on page 189.
2 Use the CustomTemplateSDE_AssetFact, and CustomTemplateSIL_AssetFact as
examples.
If the additional columns include foreign keys to dimension tables, consider the
following:
While joining with the dimensions in the SIL process, use the
DATASRC_NUM_ID as 1 for the dimensions that have only data from the
main Siebel source and join based on INTEGRATION_ID.
For the dimensions that have only data from external sources use the
appropriate DATASRC_NUM_ID and the corresponding INTEGRATION_ID.
Use the appropriate update strategy to change and insert rows.
3 Quite likely the SDE process for this will not depend on anything else.
4 Make the Custom SIL process to depend on its custom SDE process and SIL
process of the fact table you are extending.
Building a Custom Dimension Table from External Sources in Siebel Data
Warehouse
New DDLs: New staging and new dimension tables.
New Mappings: Dimension SDE and SIL mappings.
Case: Loading data for custom dimension tables.
Reference: SDE and SIL_WaveDimension in Siebel_DW_Folder.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 193
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
To build a custom dimension table from external sources
1 Follow the steps in Adding a New Dimension Table for a New Fact Table in the
Siebel Data Warehouse on page 180. Use a different DATASRC_NUM_ID while
populating the staging table.
2 Populate the custom table with incremental data. This is an important
performance consideration that requires a process on the source side that detects
new or modified records.
3 Make sure the SIL process takes care of the update strategy when loading data
incrementally. Look for examples of how it is done by inspecting any of the SIL
mappings in the standard repository like SIL_WaveDimension.
4 In the DAC, make the SIL process depend on SDE process for this custom table.
5 Register the table.
6 Add it to appropriate table groups.
Linking the Custom Dimension to a Standard Fact Table in Siebel Data
Warehouse
New DDLs: New fact extension tables or standard fact extension tables
New Mappings: Fact SDE and SIL mappings
Case: Loading data for fact tables that reference the new custom dimension
tables
Reference: CustomSDE and SIL_AssetFact in Custom_DW_Folder
To link the custom dimension to a standard fact table
1 Extend the fact tables by creating or using fact extension tables.
2 A custom SDE mapping has to be designed to populate the additional foreign key
column in the extension stage table. Make sure that the dimensions ID in the fact
staging is the same as the integration of the custom dimension. This may require
some preprocessing.
3 A custom SIL process loads data from the staging table to the fact extension
table.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
194 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
4 Develop the SQL override for populating the fact extension table to extract
foreign keys for the new dimension table. Specifically, write the query to extract
the ROW_WID of the custom dimension table using INTEGRATION_ID and
DATASRC_NUM_ID of the dimension in combination.
5 Ignore the rows for which there is not a matching ROW_WID value.
6 In the DAC, register the SDE and SIL tasks. Make the SIL mapping depend on its
corresponding SDE mapping and the SIL mapping of the base fact table.
7 Add the custom dimension to the fact table group.
Building Custom Fact Tables from External Sources in Siebel Data
Warehouse
New DDLs: New staging and new fact tables
New Mappings: SDE and SIL mappings
Case: Loading data for new fact tables
Reference: SDE and SIL_AssetFact from Siebel_DW_Rep Folder
To build custom fact tables from external sources
1 Follow the steps in Building a Custom Dimension Table from External Sources
in Siebel Data Warehouse on page 192.
2 In the custom fact SDE process, make sure that fact columns that need to
reference standard Siebel dimensions contain ROW_IDS from the Siebel data
source.
3 Make sure that the dimension IDs in fact staging table are the same as the
INTEGRATION_ID in the corresponding dimension tables. This may require
some preprocessing.
4 While creating a custom fact SIL process, make sure the SQL override statement
joins with dimension tables. Use DATASRC_NUM_ID as 1 for the dimensions
that have data from Siebel and join based on INTEGRATION_ID.
5 For the dimensions that use data entirely from external sources, use the
appropriate DATASRC_NUM_ID and the corresponding INTEGRATION_ID. Use
the appropriate update strategy to add new or change rows.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 195
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
6 In the DAC, register the tasks. Make the SIL task depend on its corresponding
SDE workflow and all the SIL tasks of its dimensions.
Customizing the Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse Customization Steps for Non-Siebel Data
196 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 197
Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception
Reports 6
Exception reports provide insight about the source data used for the ETL processes.
They provide information about the source data that can lead to erroneous results
in the Siebel Data Warehouse or may cause data loss during the ETL process. These
reports point out some of the known problematic areas, but they should not be
relied upon to find all potential data inconsistencies in the source data.
Understanding Siebel Data Warehouse Exceptions
Exception reports are defined for the following components:
List of Values. Identifies gaps and overlaps for certain LOV types.
Cost Lists. Identifies products for which the cost lists have not been defined.
Identifies the cost lists which define costs for a product in a certain currency for
overlapping periods of time.
Exchange Rates. Currency Exchange rates that do not change over a period of
time. If exchange rates are not defined for more than 30-day intervals, then they
are flagged as an exception.
Hierarchies. Entities that have circular references are flagged as exceptions. The
Siebel Data Warehouse supports 10 levels of hierarchies. If there are entities that
have more than 10 levels of hierarchies defined, they are flagged as exceptions.
List of Values Exceptions
List of Values include High and Low values that can be used as bucket values in
categories for effective analysis. If these values are not contiguous (such as gaps or
overlaps in defined values), the ETL process cannot accurately categorize the
values.
Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Understanding Siebel Data Warehouse Exceptions
198 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
An example of List of Values exceptions is shown in Table 33.
Notice that, in the example for Type MY_TYPE, there are overlaps and gaps between
records. There is an overlap of ranges between the first and second row. There is a
gap between second and third row, and between third and fourth rows.
The following LOV types are analyzed for List of Value Exceptions:
ACCNT_REVENUE_SIZE
ACCNT_EMP_SIZE
LEAD_AGE_DAYS
OPTY_REVENUE_SIZE
OPTY_UNIT_SIZE
ACCNT_REVENUE
QUOTE_AGE_DAYS
ACCNT_REVN_GROWTH
APPROVAL_AUTH_SIZE
SR_CHART_AGE
ASSET_COST_CATEGORY
Table 33. List of Values Exceptions (Example)
Type Name Low High
MY_TYPE < 100 10 100
MY_TYPE 80 200 80 200
MY_TYPE 250 300 250 300
MY_TYPE 350 400 350 400
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 199
Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Understanding Siebel Data Warehouse Exceptions
Cost List Exceptions
Cost Lists for specified products and currency should not have overlapping time
periods. If multiple cost lists are defined for a product and currency during a given
time period, then the cost for the product may not be computed correctly in the
Siebel Data Warehouse.
An example of Cost List exceptions is shown in Table 34.
In the example, Cost List 1 and 2 have definitions of cost overlapping over 06-01-
2000 to 12-31-2000.
Products Without a Cost List
During the ETL process, the costs of the products are calculated based on the Cost
List table. If the cost lists are not defined correctly, the cost of the products cannot
be calculated correctly in the Siebel Data Warehouse. This exception mapping
queries the product table and looks for a minimum of one cost list to be defined.
The products with no cost list definition are flagged as exceptions.
Exchange Rate Exceptions
The Siebel Data Warehouse supports transactions in many different currencies.
Siebel Analytics converts all currencies in the Siebel Data Warehouse to a single
currency for analysis purposes. The ETL Base Exchange Currency parameter in
System Preferences, indicates the currency to which all the financial amounts will
be converted. The Exchange rates are derived from the Exchange Rate tables in the
Siebel transactional database. If the currency exchange rates do not change for a
period of 30 days, then Siebel Analytics flags it as an exception.
Table 34. Cost List Exceptions (Example)
Cost List Product Name Currency
Start Date
(MM-DD-YYYY)
End Date
(MM-DD-YYYY) Cost
Cost List 1 Product 1 USD 01-01-2000 12-31-2000 10.00
Cost List 2 Product 1 USD 06-01-2000 06-01-2001 12.00
Cost List 3 Product 1 USD 06-01-2001 06-01-2002 13.00
Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Understanding Siebel Data Warehouse Exceptions
200 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
If there are time period gaps in the exchange rate data, the ETL process defaults to
the most recent recorded exchange rate. If the actual exchange rate is significantly
more or less favorable than what is recorded in the database, the outdated exchange
rate distorts the true value of currency amounts in the Siebel Data Warehouse.
NOTE: Exchange rates are derived from records that are of type Daily in the Siebel
transactional database. If any other types have been defined, they are not handled
without some customization.
Invalid Hierarchy Exceptions
Accounts, divisions, products, and opportunities can all have hierarchical
relationships. These entities are denormalized within the Siebel Data Warehouse
database to a fixed number of levels. Siebel Analytics supports up to ten hierarchies
levels in the Siebel transactional database. If the depth of hierarchies extends
beyond this number, results become inconsistent or incomplete.
Circular Hierarchy Exceptions
Circular Hierarchies arise when the parent-child relationship has circular
references. For example:
Siebel Analytics flags exceptions for two levels. Circular references over two
hierarchies are not flagged. For example:
Child Parent
A1 A2
A2 A1
Child Parent
A1 A2
A2 A3
A3 A1
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 201
Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Executing Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
These produce infinite levels of hierarchies. The same records will be captured
under the Invalid Hierarchy exceptions as their hierarchy depths will increase
beyond 10 levels.
Executing Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Before loading the Siebel Data Warehouse for the first time and for the subsequent
refreshes, you should plan to spend time cleansing your Siebel transactional
database data using the exception reports. The process is iterative, and requires
coordination with other team members who have responsibility for data in the
Siebel transactional database, such as the Siebel database administrator. After the
initial cleansing, you should generate the exception reports on a scheduled basis to
maintain the integrity of your data.
NOTE: Rerunning the exception reports overwrites all data contained in this view.
To cleanse the Siebel transactional database, repeat these actions until the exception
report is empty:
In the DAC, run the Exception Reports execution plan.
In the Siebel user interface, navigate to Analytics Administration > Exception
Reports.
NOTE: In Siebel Financial Services, this screen is called DataMart Administration.
For every line in the ETL Exception Reports list, fix the cause of the problem. For
information on fixing problems, see Cleansing Data.
Cleansing Data
Use a combination of the Exception Reports and the Diagnostic views to assess
changes that need to be made external to the Siebel transactional database, and
changes to the Siebel transactional database directly.
Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Executing Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
202 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
The ETL Exception Reports list contains one record for each exception flagged in the
Siebel transactional database. The ETL Exception Explanation form, located below
the ETL Exception Reports list, describes the selected exception, its effect on the
Siebel Data Warehouse building process, and offers suggestions for repairing the
data.
To fix an exception
1 Select an exception record.
2 Read and understand the text in the ETL Exception Explanation form.
3 Click the report link.
The objects data appears. (For example, if the object is an account, then the
Account form appears. If the object is a cost list, then the Cost List list appears.)
4 Repair the problem, using the text in the ETL Exception Explanation form as a
guide.
5 Return to the ETL Exception Reports list and place a check mark in the Fixed
column to indicate to others that this exception has now been fixed.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 203
Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Executing Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Using the List of Values View
Use the List of Values view, shown in Figure 15, to visually compare how the list of
values data extracted from the Siebel transactional database coordinates with the
values loaded into the Siebel Data Warehouse. The ETL process removes duplicates
and overlaps and fills data gaps. Values are extended to span the List of Values
(LOV) minimum and maximum values. Duplicates, Range Gaps, and Overlaps are
flagged by the exception reports.
The top List of Values list shows values from the Siebel transactional database and
the bottom List of Values (Data Warehouse) list shows the data that is to be used in
ETL process. You can edit the Siebel transactional database data directly in this
view, but the Siebel Data Warehouse list is read-only.
NOTE: The List of Values is extracted into the Siebel Data Warehouse where the
language is the same as the ETL Default Language set in the DAC ETL Preferences,
or whose translate flag is set to N, or those that are active.
Figure 15. List of Values List
Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Executing Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
204 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Using the Exchange Rates View
Use the Exchange Rates view to diagnose currency translation issues in the Siebel
Data Warehouse. The ETL process removes duplicates, fills gaps, and removes
overlaps. The ETL process computes exchange rates based on commutative and
associative properties, such as product and reverse rates.
The top Exchange Rates list shows currencies, the middle Exchange Rates list shows
the Siebel Data Warehouse values for active currencies and their exchange rates,
and the bottom Exchange Rates (Data Warehouse) list shows the values loaded into
the Siebel Data Warehouse for the selected currency in the upper Exchange Rates
list to the ETL Base Exchange Currency. The Exchange Rates (Data Warehouse) list
is read-only.
The Active Currencies predefined query restricts the list to the active currencies
in the Siebel transactional database.
The exception reports flag any exchange rates to the ETL Base Exchange
Currency that have not been defined within a specified period (30 days) in the
DAC ETL Preferences.
Using the Cost List View
Use the Cost List view to display the cost lists from the Siebel transactional database
from the point of view of the product, and a read-only view of the values to be
loaded into the Siebel Data Warehouse. The ETL process removes duplicates,
overlaps, and fills gaps.
The Cost List list (top) shows products, and the Cost List Line Items list (middle)
shows the cost lists associated with the selected product. The Cost Lists (Data
Warehouse) list (bottom) shows the data as it is transformed for the Siebel Data
Warehouse.
The exception reports flag products that do not appear in the Cost List list or
have Cost List time gaps and overlaps.
The Siebel Data Warehouse contains only one Cost List for a product and a
currency at a time.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 205
Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Executing Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Using the ETL History View
After all of the exceptions are corrected, the building of the data warehouse can be
initiated. This view lists the history of the ETL processes and their statuses. When
each ETL batch starts, the name of the process along with the timestamp is set, the
status is set to STARTED. When the batch completes, its status is updated to
COMPLETED.
Additional Exceptions
The above mentioned exceptions are not an exhaustive list of all possible
exceptions. Other exceptions are:
The Analysis start and end date in the DAC ETL Preferences must span the entire
period of time during which the transactions have occurred. For example, you
may want to choose an early and late date range to cover the entire time period
you are analyzing. These dates in the DAC ETL Preferences are crucial for the
building of Day Dimension, flattening of Exchange Rates, Cost Lists, and KPI
(Key Performance Indicator fact) calculations.
The DAC ETL Preferences ETL Date Format, ETL Analysis Start, ETL Analysis
End parameters, and the List of Values ETL_UNSPEC_DATE must be defined
in the same data format. If one is changed, the others must be changed
accordingly.
List of Values must be defined appropriately. If there is no appropriate entry in
List of Values, the strings that depend on List of Values in the Siebel transactional
database will not be translated.
There must be exchange rates defined for the currencies your organization deals
with. If the appropriate exchange values are not found, the ETL process uses the
ETL Unknown Exchange Rate defined in the DAC ETL Preferences.
Using Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
Executing Siebel Data Warehouse Exception Reports
206 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Version 7.7 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 207
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
7
This section includes the following topics:
Upgrade Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse 7.7 on page 208
Siebel Data Warehouse 7.7 Product Changes and Customization Impacts on
page 208
Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade Paths on page 209
Approaches to Upgrading the Siebel Data Warehouse on page 210
Process of Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade on page 211
Data Migration Workflows for Siebel Data Warehouse Data Upgrades on
page 213
Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade Customizations on page 216
Data Migration Workflows for Siebel Industry Applications Data Warehouse
Upgrades on page 221
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Upgrade Paths for Data Warehouse
208 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Upgrade Requirements for Siebel Data Warehouse 7.7
A thorough understanding of Informatica, Siebel Data Warehouse, Siebel OLTP and
Data Warehouse Application Console (DAC) is a prerequisite before proceeding with
the upgrade.
Siebel Data Warehouse 7.7 Product Changes and
Customization Impacts
The changes in Siebel Data Warehouse mainly involve performance enhancements.
Included are enhancements in the areas of change capture, reorganization of data,
new data elements (like mini dimension), streamlining Informatica mappings, and
so on. Your previous customizations may be affected by these changes. In these
cases, reworking may be required to make sure that the customizations still function
after the data warehouse is upgraded.
In addition to these enhancements, a new tool called the Data Warehouse
Application Console (DAC) has been provided to efficiently manage Informatica
sessions. All custom Informatica sessions need to be registered and managed using
the DAC.
See the following list to identify whether or not user customizations will be
impacted:
All custom data warehouse tables, indexes, and Informatica sessions will need
to be registered with the DAC
Any reference to image tables (change capture mechanism)
Any reference to the following data warehouse tables:
W_MAP_DIM
W_ORDERITEM_F
W_QUOTEITEM_F
S_ETL_SRC_TABLE
S_ETL_I_IMAGE
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 209
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Approaches to Upgrade
S_ETL_R_IMAGE
Any reference to existing aggregates
After the customization impact is determined, an upgrade plan needs to be
formalized for making the necessary changes. See Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade
Customizations on page 216 for procedures.
Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade Paths
Following are the upgrade paths:
7.5.2.x to 7.7 Upgrade Path. Figure 16 shows the upgrade path to upgrade from
an Analytics 7.5.2.x environment to Analytics 7.7.
NOTE: You must upgrade from Informatica 5.x to Informatica 6.2.1 before using the
7.7 Repository.
Figure 16. Upgrade Path Analytics 7.5.2.X to Analytics 7.7
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Upgrade Paths for Data Warehouse
210 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
7.0.x to 7.7 Upgrade Path. Figure 17shows the upgrade path to upgrade from an
Analytics 7.0.x environment to Analytics 7.7. The upgrade path from 7.0.x to 7.7
is a two-step processfirst, you need to upgrade to 7.5.2.x and then use the
procedures in this guide to upgrade to 7.7.
NOTE: After upgrade, the new or updated data will go through fixed transformation.
Old data might be different due to defects. The best way to avoid this issue is to
build a new Data Warehouse instead of upgrading the Data Warehouse data.
Approaches to Upgrading the Siebel Data Warehouse
There are two approaches to upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse, upgrading with
Data Warehouse migration and upgrading without Data Warehouse migration.
Figure 17. Upgrade Path Analytics 7.0.X to Analytics 7.7
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 211
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Approaches to Upgrade
Upgrade with Data Warehouse data migration. In this approach all the existing data in
the Data Warehouse is upgraded using the 7.7 upgrade processes. The advantages
of this approach are that you retain all your historical data, such as slowly changing
dimension, pipeline, and so on. This process is faster than reloading the entire data
again. To implement this kind of upgrade, see the procedures in OLTP Environment
(Analytics-Specific) Upgrade on page 212, and Data Migration Workflows for
Siebel Data Warehouse Data Upgrades on page 213.
Upgrade without Data Warehouse data migration. In this approach all the data from
OLTP is reloaded again into the Data Warehouse (Full Load) using the 7.7
repository. The advantages of this approach are that you retain all the bug fixes, and
the data is consistent. The disadvantages to this approach are that you would loose
historical data like slowly changing dimension, pipeline, and so on. This process
takes a longer time to complete than upgrading with data migration. To implement
this kind of upgrade follow procedures listed in Process of Siebel Data Warehouse
Upgrade on page 211, Data Migration Workflows for Siebel Data Warehouse Data
Upgrades on page 213, and Running the Data Migration Workflow for
Preconfigured Content in Siebel Data Warehouse on page 215. After completing
these procedures, run a full load from DAC.
Process of Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade
To upgrade Data Warehouse, the administrator typically performs the following
tasks:
OLTP Environment (Analytics-Specific) Upgrade on page 212
Siebel Data Warehouse Environment Upgrade on page 212t
Data Migration Workflows for Siebel Data Warehouse Data Upgrades on
page 213
Either of the following:
Running the Data Migration Workflow for Preconfigured Content in Siebel
Data Warehouse on page 215
Running the Data Migration Workflow for Preconfigured Siebel Industry
Applications Content on page 222
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Upgrade Paths for Data Warehouse
212 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade Customizations on page 216
OLTP Environment (Analytics-Specific) Upgrade
The Siebel eBusiness .sif files are located under the dwrep directory, and the
performance_hor.sif file contains last_upd indexes. INCA_OLTP.sif file contains the
OLTP schema changes required for Analytics 7.7.
Siebel Data Warehouse Environment Upgrade
Upgrading the Siebel Data Warehouse environment requires upgrading both the
Informatica software and the Informatica repository.
Informatica software upgrade. See documentation from Informatica on how to
upgrade to Informatica 6.2.1 and to upgrade your existing repository to Informatica
6.2.1. See Siebel eBusiness Third-Party Bookshelf.
NOTE: Back up your existing repository before you upgrade.
Informatica repository upgrade. The following is the high-level process to upgrade
Informatica Repository. You must upgrade your software to Informatica 6.2.1,
upgrade your current repository to Informatica 6.2.1, and install and configure DAC
before you start this process. You also need an additional database for the new
Siebel Analytics 7.7 Informatica repository.
1 Create and configure the new Siebel Analytics 7.7 Informatica repository using
DAC.
2 Upgrade any customizations. See Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade
Customizations on page 216 for information on how to upgrade
customizations.
NOTE: See Chapter , Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse for
installing and configuring DAC and step-by-step instructions to create and configure
a new Informatica repository.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 213
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Approaches to Upgrade
Siebel Data Warehouse schema upgrade. Upgrade the 7.5.x Siebel Data Warehouse
schema using the ddlimp application.
NOTE: The ddlsme.ctl file can be found under the dwrep directory and ddlimp under
the bin directory as per the internal builds, the structure of the official builds
shipped to customers need to be verified.
ddlimp /u database_user /p database_password /c odbc_datasource /f
path of ddlsme.ctl file/G SSE_ROLE /R Y /s N /l log file path
For example:
ddlimp /u ORA04521 /p ORA04521 /c qa4e /f C:\upgrade\ddlsme.ctl /G
SSE_ROLE /R Y /s N /l C:\upgrade\incaolapcr.log
NOTE: Use the Merant/DataDirect driver while creating the ODBC data source to be
used in ddlimp. You can get the Merant/DataDirect driver when you install Siebel
Components like Siebel Server or twsiebel. Use the /w Y option, if your database
is Unicode.
NOTE: When creating Unicode tables, you need to use the parameter /Z for DB2 and
MSSQL databases, and /W for Oracle databases.
Data Migration Workflows for Siebel Data Warehouse
Data Upgrades
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse data requires use of data migration workflows to
migrate preconfigured content. The data upgrade process consists of the following
Informatica workflows:
Upgrade_DAW. This workflow contains mappings to move data from the old set
of system tables, such as S_ETL_RUN_S, which contains the run information, to
the new table, W_ETL_DEFN_RUN, and so on.
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Upgrade Paths for Data Warehouse
214 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Upgrade_R_Image. This workflow contains mappings to load the r_tables with
data for the period instead of a monolithic r_image table consisting of data for
all processed rows for all the tables.
Upgrade_Unspecifieds. This workflow contains mappings for modifying the
Unspecified values for List Of Val, Product Attribute, Sub Set Dimension is
loaded.
Upgrade_Agree. This workflow contains mappings to load the Agree mini
dimension and update the Agree Dimension, Agree Fact and Agree Item Fact
with the mini wid. Also columns SEX_MF_CD, SEX_MF_CD_I in W_PERSON_D
and W_PERSON_SCD are updated. In addition column DATASOURCE_NUM_ID
is set to 1 for the Unspecified rows as it has been modified in Analytics version
7.7.
Upgrade_Asset. This workflow contains mappings to load the Asset mini
dimension and update the Asset Dimension and Asset Fact with the mini wid.
Also, some denormalized columns are loaded to the Asset Fact.
Upgrade_Opty. This workflow contains mappings to load the Opty mini
dimension and update the Opty Dimension, Revenue Fact, Opty Contact Fact and
Pipeline Fact with the mini wid. Also, some denormalized columns are loaded
to the Revenue Fact, Opty Contact Fact, and Opty Stage Fact, and Pipeline Fact.
Upgrade_Order. This workflow contains mappings to load the Order Mini
Dimension and update the Order Dimension and Order Item Fact with the mini
wid. Also some denormalized columns are loaded to the Order Fact. In addition,
the Order Item Fact is now split into Order Fact containing only the header rows,
and Order Item fact containing only the line item details the header rows that
previously existed are deleted.
Upgrade_Quote. This workflow contains mappings to load the Quote Mini
Dimension and update the Quote Dimension and Quote Item Fact with the mini
wid. Also, some denormalized columns are loaded to the Quote Fact. In
addition, the Quote Item Fact is now split into Quote Fact containing only the
header rows and Quote Item fact containing only the line item details the header
rows that previously existed are deleted.
Upgrade_Response. This workflow contains mappings to load the Response mini
dimension and update the Response Dimension and Response Fact with the mini
wid. Also some denormalized columns are loaded to the Response Fact.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 215
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Approaches to Upgrade
Upgrade_ServiceRequest. This workflow contains mappings to load the
ServiceRequest mini dimension and update the ServiceRequest Dimension and
ServiceRequest Fact with the mini wid. Also, some denormalized columns are
loaded to the ServiceRequest Fact.
Upgrade_Others. This workflow contains mappings to load Region to Geo
Dimension and load Geo Wid to Person Dimension, Person SCD, and Org
Dimension. Also, some denormalized columns are loaded into Survey and
Activity Fact. In addition, columns VENDOR_NAME and PR_PROD_LN in
W_PRODUCT_D and W_PRODUCT_SCD are modified.
Upgrade_Visibility. This workflow contains mappings to update table_wid, which
have changed in Analytics version 7.7, and the previous source for the table_wid
S_ETL_SRC_TABLE, which is deprecated in this release. The visibility tables that
are modified in this workflow are W_ACT_PARTY, W_CON_PARTY,
W_HHOLD_PARTY, W_OPTY_PARTY, W_ORDER_PARTY, W_ORG_PARTY,
W_PROG_PARTY, W_QUOTE_PARY, W_RESP_PARTY, W_SEG_PARTY, and
W_SR_PARTY.
UpgradeSlowlyChangingDimensionStartDates. This workflow contains mappings to
update SCD_START_DT_WID, which has changed in Analytics version 7.7. The
Slowly Changing Dimensions tables that are modified in this workflow are
W_PERSON_SCD, W_HHOLD_SCD, W_PL_ITEM_SCD, and
W_PRODUCT_SCD.
Running the Data Migration Workflow for Preconfigured
Content in Siebel Data Warehouse
Run the workflows under the Upgrade Folder. The following is a list of the upgrades
to be run and the order in which to run them:
Upgrade_DAW
Upgrade_R_Image
Upgrade_Unspecifieds (This workflow should be run before running any of the
subsequent workflows.)
Upgrade_Agree
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Upgrade Paths for Data Warehouse
216 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Upgrade_Asset
Upgrade_Opty
Upgrade_Order
Upgrade_Quote
Upgrade_Response
Upgrade_ServiceRequest
Upgrade_Others
Upgrade_Visibility
UpgradeSlowlyChangingDimensionStartDates
To run the data migration workflow for preconfigured content
Right-click on the desired workflow, and click on Start Workflow to execute it.
Siebel Data Warehouse Upgrade Customizations
This section describes how to upgrade your customizations. Customization upgrade
consists of upgrading Informatica mappings customizations and registering them in
DAC.
Upgrading Informatica Repository Customizations
To upgrade Informatica repository customizations, use the following procedure.
To copy your custom folder from your existing Informatica repository to the newly
restored 7.7 Informatica repository
1 Launch Informatica Repository Manager and connect to both your current and
newly restored 7.7 Informatica Repositories (restored in the Informatica
repository upgrade, see Siebel Data Warehouse Environment Upgrade on
page 212).
2 Select the custom folder in your current repository and copy it (Edit >Copy).
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 217
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Approaches to Upgrade
3 Select the newly restored 7.7 Informatica Repository and paste it (Edit >Paste).
(Rename the folder if necessary to paste it in this location.)
This action will create the custom folder and all its contents (mappings,
workflows and so on).
4 Create an individual workflow for each of the mappings in the custom folder.
These mappings, once registered, would be used by the DAC, and the workflow
previously batched would not be used by the DAC.
Modifying Data Extracts
In Analytics version 7.7, the changed data is loaded into image table for incremental
loads but not for full loads. Therefore, the source qualifier for extracts (that is, all
mappings whose name starts with SDE_), uses views that are built differently for
incremental and full load by DAC. Use the procedures in this section to access the
views.
If your mapping is using a new source table (that is, if this source table does not
exist in the DAC repository) see Registering Customization in the DAC on
page 219 for the procedure to register a new source table and create the
corresponding new image tables. (In Analytics version 7.7, every source table which
is incrementally loaded will have a corresponding three image tables.)
To upgrade customization in the Custom Folder
1 Replace the source primary table (primary table is the one which joins with the
image table) to use the corresponding view.
You can get the view name by replacing the prefix of the source table name S_
with V_.
2 Remove the old image table (S_ETL_I_IAMGE) and S_ETL_SRC_TABLE from the
from list.
3 Remove the join between the source table, old image table (S_ETL_I_IMG) and
S_ETL_SRC_TABLE.
Example of a 7.5.3 Override
The following example shows the previous and current version of the SQL override
of the Source Qualifier for the Wave Dimension. The changes are highlighted.
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Upgrade Paths for Data Warehouse
218 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
SELECT
S_DD_CAMP_WAVE.ROW_ID,
S_DD_CAMP_WAVE.SRC_ID, S_DD_CAMP_WAVE.SEQ_NUM,
S_DD_CAMP_WAVE.ALLOC_PCT, S_DD_CAMP_WAVE.DT_LAG
FROM
S_DD_CAMP_WAVE,
S_ETL_I_IMAGE IMG,
S_ETL_SRC_TABLE ISRC
WHERE
((S_DD_CAMP_WAVE.ROW_ID = IMG.ROW_ID
AND
IMG.TABLE_WID = ISRC.ROW_WID
AND
ISRC.TABLE_NAME = 'S_DD_CAMP_WAVE'
))
7.7 SQL Override
SELECT $$Hint1
S_DD_CAMP_WAVE.ROW_ID,
S_DD_CAMP_WAVE.SRC_ID, S_DD_CAMP_WAVE.SEQ_NUM,
S_DD_CAMP_WAVE.ALLOC_PCT, S_DD_CAMP_WAVE.DT_LAG
FROM
V_DD_CAMP_WAVE S_DD_CAMP_WAVE
$$Hint2
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 219
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Approaches to Upgrade
If you have customized W_ORDERITEM_F or W_QUOTEITEM_F you need to redo
them according to the new way (Both these facts are now split For Example:
W_ORDERITEM_F is split into W_ORDER_F containing only header rows and
W_ORDERITEM_F containing only line item rows). See the new Siebel Data
Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide for more details on these facts.
If your customized mappings are using W_MAP_DIM tables modify them to get
value from the base tables as map tables are no longer used. See the modifications
in the new mappings for W_PERSON_D and W_REVN_F to compare the changes
due to the removal of W_MAP_DIM
If you have customized mappings in the Main Folder, use the following procedure.
To upgrade customization in the Main Folder
Manually apply the changes to the corresponding mappings (find equivalent
mappings using the mapping name) in the newly restored 7.7 Informatica
repository and follow the steps in the previous procedure for upgrading
customization in the Custom Folder.
Registering Customization in the DAC
New Source Table: If your mapping is using a new source table (that is, if this source
table does not exist in the DAC repository), then you need to do the following.
To register customization in the DAC for a new source table
1 Register the tables in the DAC Repository (Design - Tables - Create New Record
for the corresponding table), and assign new suffix to it if this is a Siebel source
table for which you want to do incremental ETL.(Use a suffix >500 and <999).
2 Create the image tables for those tables by right-clicking on the entry and
choosing 'Generate Change Capture Scripts' and then manually creating the
tables by applying the scripts generated on the OLTP database.
If your mapping is using a new target table (that is, if this target table does not exist
in the DAC repository) use the following procedure.
To register customization in DAC for a new target table
1 Register the tables in the DAC Repository (Design - Tables - Create New Record
for the corresponding table).
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Upgrade Paths for Data Warehouse
220 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
2 Register the indices in the DAC Repository (Design - Index - Create New Record
for the corresponding index).
3 Add the table under the group (Design - Table Groups - Create New Record for
the corresponding table group).
Typically there is one table group per star. Also, when multiple tables need to be
built together, you can create an independent group as well. If there is no group
that you can associate with the table, then create one.
4 Under the desired Subject Area (Design - Subject Area), add the table group, if
any were created.
If none of the subject areas satisfies your needs, then create a new one.
5 Under the desired Execution Plan (Design - Execution Plan), add any newly
created Subject areas, if any.
You can run Execution Plans either manually or create schedules to run them
periodically.
To register customization in the DAC for the Custom Folder
1 Import the Informatica Sessions by choosing DAC Repository Management >
Import Informatica Sessions.
This imports all the workflow names and folders into DAC repository.
2 If your Informatica Repository is on a database other than the Siebel Data
Warehouse database, define the database connection on your DAC repository by
choosing Edit Setup > DAC System Properties and then editing Preferences Main
Informatica Repository to reflect the name of the connection that you created.
If you have created a new mapping in the Custom Folder use the following
procedure.
NOTE: If you are using a new source or target table, complete the procedures for
registering a new source or target table, before proceeding further.
To register customization in the DAC for a new mapping in the Custom Folder
1 Create separate workflows to populate each table.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 221
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Approaches to Upgrade
2 Go to Tools > Import Informatica Workflows in DAC to bring in the newly
created workflows in DAC's temporary table.
3 Register those as Tasks in DAC Repository (Design - Task Definitions).
a Choose the appropriate workflow name for full and incremental command
names.
b Choose Execution Type to be Informatica.
4 Define the execution order by specifying the dependencies.
For example, if the task needs to be run after certain other tasks, then add these
tasks to Depends On (Design > Task Definition > Depends On Tasks).
5 Specify the source and target tables.
For the procedures using source tables that require change capture, check the
Build Image property of the Task Definition, and choose those tables as Primary
or Auxilliary.
NOTE: Use the change capture procedure only for Primary or Auxilliary tables.
If you have copied over an existing mapping to the Custom Folder and modified it
use the following procedure.
To register a customized mapping inside the Custom Folder
1 Modify the existing task to point to the Custom Folder.
2 Modify the execution order if necessary.
Data Migration Workflows for Siebel Industry
Applications Data Warehouse Upgrades
Siebel Industry Applications upgrade workflows include the following functionality:
SIA_Upgrade_R_Image. This workflow contains mappings to load the r_tables with
data for the period instead of a monolithic r_image table consisting data for all
processed rows for all the tables.
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Upgrade Paths for Data Warehouse
222 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
SIA_Upgrade_Unspecifieds. This workflow contains mappings for modifying the
Unspecified values of DATASOURCE_NUM_ID for each Dimension is loaded. It also
modifies the Unspecified values for List Of Value Dimension, Activity Product Fact,
Fund Fact, Medical Education Fact, Promotion Fact, Revenue Fact, Syndicated Data
Fact, Syndicated Market Fact, and Vehicle Fact.
LS_Upgrade_ActivityProduct. This workflow contains mappings to update the Activity
Product Fact with the PRD_CALL_IND & VIS_PR_POS_ID.
LS_Upgrade_Others. This workflow contains mappings to load Geo Wid to Position
Contact Dimension. It also contains the mapping to update the Medical Education,
Objective, Profile Rank, Syndicated Data, and Syndicated Market Fact with the
VIS_PR_POS_ID.
SIA_Upgrade_Household. This workflow contains mapping to update
INCOME_RANGE and INCOME_RANGE_I in W_HOUSEHOLD_D because the OLTP
source is changed.
FINS_Upgrade_Visibility. This workflow contains mappings to update table_wid,
which has changed in Analytics 7.7, and the previous source for the table_wid
S_ETL_SRC_TABLE, which is deprecated in this release. The visibility tables that are
modified in this workflow are W_ASSET_PARTY, W_CLAIM_PARTY, and
W_HLDNG_PARTY.
SIA_UpgradeSlowlyChangingDimensionStartDates. This workflow contains mappings
to update SCD_START_DT_WID, which has changed in this release. The Slowly
Changing Dimensions tables that are modified in this workflow are W_ASSET_SCD,
and W_INS_CLAIM_SCD & W_OPTY_SCD.
Running the Data Migration Workflow for Preconfigured
Siebel Industry Applications Content
Run the workflows under the Upgrade_7.5.XtoINCA_1 folder.
The upgrades to be run and the order in which to run them is as follows:
Upgrade_DAW
Upgrade_R_Image
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 223
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Approaches to Upgrade
Upgrade_Unspecifieds (This workflow should be run before running any of the
other subsequent workflows.)
Upgrade_Agree
Upgrade_Asset
Upgrade_Opty
Upgrade_Order
Upgrade_Quote
Upgrade_Response
Upgrade_ServiceRequest
Upgrade_Others
Upgrade_Visibility
UpgradeSlowlyChangingDimensionStartDates
For more detailed information on running data migration workflows, see Running
the Data Migration Workflow for Preconfigured Content in Siebel Data Warehouse
on page 215.
After the preceding workflows are executed successfully, run the workflows under
Upgrade_7.5.XtoINCA_2 folder.
The upgrades to be run and the order in which to run them is as follows:
SIA_Upgrade_R_Image
SIA_Upgrade_Unspecifieds (This workflow should be run before running any of
the subsequent workflows.)
LS_Upgrade_ActivityProduct
LS_Upgrade_Others
SIA_Upgrade_Household
FINS_Upgrade_Visibility
SIA_UpgradeSlowlyChangingDimensionStartDates
Upgrading Siebel Data Warehouse
Upgrade Paths for Data Warehouse
224 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 225
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
8
Look up any problems, error messages, and other issues in the following topics.
Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Initial Configuration Issues on
page 225
Informatica and Loading Issues on page 226
Unicode Issues with Informatica and the Siebel Data Warehouse on page 230
UNIX Installation Issues with the Siebel Data Warehouse on page 232
Siebel Data Warehouse Application Console (DAC) Issues on page 235
Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Initial Configuration Issues
Problem. Cannot connect to the Siebel Data Warehouse running on DB2.
Possible cause. Make sure that the DB2 configuration matches the requirements
listed in IBM DB2 UDB Windows 2000-Specific Database Requirements for Siebel
Data Warehouse on page 29.
Problem. After installing Informaticas ODBC driver (V3.5) on a Windows computer,
you can not open the Query Analyzer and the Enterprise Manager shows an error
message.
Probable cause. The ODBC driver installation replaces the odbcbcp.dll file with an
older version. The Informatica documentation contains the procedure for correcting
this problem.
Problem. Cannot connect to Siebel transactional database from Informatica.
Possible cause. Make sure that the server running the Informatica Server software
has an ODBC connection to the Siebel transactional database using a Siebel ODBC
driver, and an ODBC connection to the Siebel Data Warehouse using the Merant
Closed 3.5 32-bit driver.
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
226 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Problem. Error: ORA-12541: TNS:no listener.
Possible cause. Check the Compatibility tab in Informatica service configuration. It
should be Oracle 8. If it is not set to Oracle 8, change it and restart the Informatica
server.
Problem. Error 2140 (Informatica service failed to start).
Possible causes. The server may not be started or the Informatica Service may not
be started. See Informaticas installation and configuration guide on Siebel
eBusiness Third-Party Bookshelf for detailed information.
Problem. Informatica installation fails with an Unhandled Exception error and
displays a message similar to this: Error Number: 0x80040707. Description: Dll
function call crashed: ISRT._DoInstall.
Possible causes. Most likely the computer is running out of virtual memory. Restart
the computer and reinstall Informatica.
Informatica and Loading Issues
Double-click the workflow to view the log file details.
Problem. Double-clicking the workflow yields a Workflow Manager error message:
The system cannot find the file specified.
Probable Cause. The session log files are not set up properly. You also may need to
change the text editor.
Problem. Using Oracle, some mappings hang when running when performance
statistics are switched on.
Probable Cause. When running some Informatica mappings for loading the Siebel
Data Warehouse, turning on the Performance Statistics can cause the mapping to
hang. The only workaround is to increase the values of the LMSharedMemory and
MaxSessions variables in Informatica. The risk of increasing the LMSharedMemory
too much is that it may start to have a serious effect on overall performance of the
machine that the Informatica server is running on.
Problem. When you execute a workflow on the Informatica Workflow Manager, you
get the following error message:
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 227
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
Request to start workflow (workflow name) on server (server name) not
successful.
Probable cause. This can happen due to a server time-out property that is usually set
to 20 or 40 seconds. When you try to run a large workflow, every session in that
workflow is fetched into the server's memory. If this takes longer than the server
time-out property, the server returns a message that the workflow was unable to
run. However, the workflow is running, but the server just needs time to complete
fetching the sessions into memory. Double-click the workflow to view the log file
details.
Problem. When running Full_Extract_Siebel_DW or Refresh_Extract_Siebel_DW,
Informatica returns errors similar to:
TE_7007 Transformation Evaluation Error; current row skipped...
TE_7007 [<<Transformation Error>> [to_date]: Date function error
to_date('19010101', 'DD-MON-YYYY')
Probable cause. Incorrect date entry in the SME Date Format field in the System
Preferences. The format is YYYYMMDD.
Problem. When running Full_Load_Siebel_DW, Informatica returns errors similar to:
CMN_1014 Error creating semaphore...
TM_6006 Error initializing DTM for session...
TM_6006 [s_CR18a1. Load W_PROG_DM_TMP - Program Records]
Probable cause. Insufficient semaphores allocated. Allocate more semaphores on the
Data Warehouse Server. The change becomes effective when you reboot.
Problem. Informatica (RDBMS is DB2) gives this error message:
Error occurred unlocking [SDE_ServiceRequestDimension1].
An error occurred while accessing the repository[[IBM][CLI
Driver][DB2/6000] SQL0955C
Sort memory cannot be allocated to process the statement. Reason
code = "".
SQLSTATE=57011]
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
228 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
DB2 Fatal Error[FnName: ExecuteDirect -- SQLSTATE=57011
[IBM][CLI Driver][DB2/6000]
Probable cause. The DB2 parameter SHEAPTHRES is too small.
Problem. Informatica produces the error Unable to connect to the server when
running a full load of the Siebel Data Warehouse
(Full_Load_Siebel_DW_Dimensions).
Probable cause. The last Designer session was not validated. Part of the development
process of working with Designer is to always validate any changes to Informatica
mappings definitions and sessions after the change is saved in repository.
Problem. When loading the data warehouse, Informatica reports a lock problem.
Probable cause. Either someone has a session open or there is a dead session. Make
sure no one has any open sessions. If no sessions are open, then follow the
Informatica documentation on removing locks caused by dead sessions.
Problem. After changing an Informatica mapping, you may get an error message
when trying to execute Full_Load_Siebel_DW_Facts. The error message is
Unable to connect to the server.
Probable Cause. This is due to Informatica mapping objects that have been modified
and this does not automatically validate the session objects. You must validate all
changes to any existing mappings in the Informatica repository.
Problem. Session SDE_RecordLoadStart fails due to unique constraint error while
executing Full_Load_Siebel_DW_Dimensions or Full_Load_Siebel_DW_Facts.
Probable Cause. This could be because the previous full load did not complete
successfully. Fix the problem that caused the previous load session to fail. Make
sure you start the process from last entry of Load_RestartNextWorkflow # before the
failed session, and restart the workflow process from that point.
If you have to reextract the data from the Siebel transactional database because
something had to be fixed in source database to resolve the load error then you must
restart the ETL process. Truncate S_ETL_INC_STAT in the Siebel transactional
database, then enable the Extract and Load workflows and rerun them.
Problem. Session SDEINC_RecordExtractStart fails due to unique constraint error
while executing a Refresh workflow.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 229
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
Probable Cause. This could be because the previous load or refresh did not complete
successfully. Fix the problem that caused the previous refresh session to fail. Make
sure you start the process from last entry of %RestartNextWorkflow # before the
failed session, and restart the workflow process from that point.
Problem. The session fails and you receive the following error code:
Error "TE_7042 Aggregate Error: File Operation Error
Probable Cause. This is due to a disk space limitation. Check the /Informatica/
PowerMart/Cache/Check directory for available disk space, also check the limits
(ulimit) of the account used to start PowerMart.
Problem. Informatica sessions get deadlocked and eventually fail when they try to
do a select from the repository table OPB_OBJECT_LOCKS. This problem
sometimes occurs on MSSQL server databases.
Probable Cause. This is possibly caused by a limited number of resources on the
MSSQL Database Server. The workaround is to execute the following MSSQL
specific SQL command on the Siebel Data Warehouse:
DROP INDEX OPB_OBJECT_LOCKS.OPB_OBJ_LOCKS_IDX
DROP INDEX OPB_OBJECT_LOCKS.OPB_OBJ_LOCKS_IDX2
DROP INDEX OPB_OBJECT_LOCKS.OPB_OBJ_LOCKS_IDX3
Upon completion of executing these commands, proceed executing the workflow
processes to load the Siebel Data Warehouse.
Problem. An error may occur when trying to send a post session email notification
using MS Outlook 2000. Refer to Informatica release notes for further information.
Probable Cause. After installing Informatica Server on Windows, copy the file
mapi32.dll from winnt\\system32 to the bin folder where the Informatica Server is
installed, overwriting the existing mapi32.dll in that directory. Start the Informatica
Server so that the Informatica Server can use the new mapi32.dll.
The Extended MAPI Error. MAPILogonEx failed[2147746065] error indicates that
the logon is not configured correctly. Check the following:
1 Under Services > Informatica> Logon, make sure the login
(domain\username) and password are correct.
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
230 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
2 Under Control Panel > Mail (it may also be called Mail and Fax or Exchange) >
Services > Show Profiles, make sure the mail profile is correct.
3 Under Programs> Informatica Server > Informatica Server Setup>
Miscellaneous, make sure the MS Exchange profile is correct.
Problem. While creating a custom session, bulk load mode does not work properly
with SQL Server.
Probable Cause. Change the mode to normal in Informatica repository for the
session. The normal mode must be used everywhere for SQL Server in all of your
custom sessions.
Problem. When running IMR, you may receive an error message box which states
The evaluation period for this Oracle ODBC driver has expired. Please call Merant
to obtain a production version of this Oracle ODBC driver.
Probable Cause. This is caused by a down-level ODBC driver license key. Rename or
move ivodbc.lic, lvodbc.lic (if it exists), and lvdw.lic (if it exists). Make sure you
have only one license file named ivdw.lic in winnt\system32. This eliminates the
problem.
Problem. Outlook closes when sending out a notification of finishing the ETL
process.
Probable Cause. Informatica is closing Outlook. This issue is known to Informatica
and is scheduled to be resolved in an upcoming release. Until then, create a second
profile in Outlook and add that profile name to the Informatica server setup.
Unicode Issues with Informatica and the Siebel Data Warehouse
Problem. Task fails and generates the error message: "TRANSF_1_1_1_1> TE_7073
Aggregate Error: Expecting keys to be ascending. Tasks known to fail are
SDE_DtlForecastFact and SDE_CostList
Workaround. In Informatica Mapping Designer, open the corresponding mapping and
in the Aggregator transformation, remove the check from the Sortedinput check
box.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 231
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
Problem. In the Windows 2000 environment, with a double-byte language, such as
Japanese, when you try to input the path for the directory where Informatica is
installed (such as c:\Program Files\Informatica\Informatica PowerMart 6.2.1 Siebel
XXX(JPN char) OEM - Server) for the value $PMRootDir in the Workflow Manager,
the double-byte characters are converted to question marks. This causes the ETL to
fail because it cannot find the Informatica PowerMart 6.2.1 Siebel OEM - Server
folder and its subdirectories.
Workaround. Share the folder under a new name with no double-byte characters, and
use the network share as the value for $PMRootDir.
Problem. When Configuring the Informatica Server or Informatica Repository Server,
there are major truncations in some of the tabs.
For example, in the Server tab and the Repository tab in the Configure Informatica
Service screen (Start > Programs > Informatica Server > Informatica Server
Setup > Configure Informatica Service), the field names are truncated.
Workaround. Informatica 6.x does not support non-English messages and resources.
Delete the following files to display all messages in English.
PC/PM client folder\*411.dll
PMServer folder\bin\*411.dll
PMRepServer folder\bin\*411.dll
Problem. Unable to start the Informatica repository with the Informatica Repository
Server on UNIX.
The Siebel_DW_Rep (MS Windows Japanese and superset of Shift-JIS) is not
compatible with that of pmrepagent (UTF-8 encoding of Unicode).
Solution. Make sure Japanese locales are installed on the UNIX machine. The
environment variables on the UNIX machine are not complete. Set the environment
variable PM_CODEPAGENAME to MS932. For other languages, set the variable
appropriately.
Problem. The database connection code page is incorrect for Unicode/Non-Latin
code pages.
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
232 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Workaround. The database connection code page has to be set manually through the
informatica Workflow Manager.
1 Start the Workflow Manger.
2 Connect to the Siebel_DW_Rep using Administrator as the user.
3 Click Menu Connection > Select Relational.
4 Select the appropriate OLTP connection (DB2_OLTP for DB2, ORA_OLTP for
Oracle, MSSQL_OLTP or ODBC_OLTP for MSSQL).
5 For the code page select the UTF-8 encoding of Unicode or the appropriate code
page, and then click OK.
6 Select the OLAP connection (DB2_OLAP for DB2, ORA_OLAP for Oracle,
MSSQL_OLAP or ODBC_OLTP for MSSQL).
7 For the code page select the UTF-8 encoding of Unicode or the appropriate code
page, and then click OK.
Problem. Unable to install Informatica PowerMart on non-English UNIX locales (for
example, ESN, DEU, FRA, ITA). The following error message appears: "FATAL
ERROR during initialization, Invalid language specified, Application terminated."
Workaround. This error will occur when the locale environment variables are set
inconsistently or not at all. These settings are determined by entering the command
locale at the UNIX command prompt. Make sure the correct locales are installed
on the UNIX machine. Set the environment variable PM_CODEPAGENAME
correctly (For example set it to MS932 for Japanese).
UNIX Installation Issues with the Siebel Data Warehouse
Problem. When starting Informatica in pmserver.log, the following error messages
appear:
FATAL ERROR: LM_36023 [Tue Mar 11 23:12:41 2003] : (9968|1) The IP address
[172.0.129.141] for this machine did not match the IP address [172.20.94] in the
repository for server [SIEBEL_DW_SERVER].
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 233
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
FATAL ERROR: SF_34014 [Tue Mar 11 23:13:41 2003] : (9968|1) Server initialization
failed.
INFO: SF_34014 [Tue Mar 11 23:13:41 2003] : (9968|1) Server shut down.
Solution. Launch Workflow Manager, then right-click on SIEBEL_DW_REP and click
More. Make sure the Host Name is the machine name where the Informatica
Repository Server resides.
Problem. When connecting to the Informatica Repository Server from the Repository
Administration Console, the following error messages:
Oracle databases running on Solaris or HP:
Database Connection Error: Database driver event...Error occurred loading
library [Bad magic number for shared library: /export/home/oracle/9.0.1.3/lib/
libclntsh.sl]Database driver event...Error occurred loading library [libpmora8.sl]
Solution. Use Oracle 32-bit library.
a Set the environment variable as follows: LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/export/
home/oracle/9.0.1.3/lib32
b Restart the Informatica Repository Server service.
DB2 databases running on AIX:
(17764|1) Database Connection Error : Database driver event...Error occurred
loading library [No such file or directory]Database driver event...Error occurred
loading library [libpmdb2.a]
Solution. Set the environment variable as follows:
For DB2 v8:
setenv LIBPATH ${LIBPATH}:/usr/opt/db2_08_01/lib
For DB2 v7
setenv LIBPATH ${LIBPATH}:/usr/lpp/db2_07_01/lib
Restart the Informatica Repository Server service, after setting the variable.
Problem. When restoring the Informatica repository, the following error message
appears in the dwdb.log:
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
234 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
ERROR : OBJM_54543 [Tue Mar 25 17:47:16 2003] : (164|2484) DataBase error:
ORA-01461: can bind a LONG value only for insert into a LONG column
Solution. The database is Unicode and the environment variable is needed.
For Unicode UTF8, set the environment variable to
American_America.UTF8.
For Unicode AL32UTF8, set the environment variable to
American_America.AL32UTF8.
Problem. When starting pmserver on UNIX, the following error message appears:
INFO : LM_36039 [Thu Mar 27 11:40:29 2003] : (6772|1) The maximum number of
sessions that can run simultaneously is [10].
FATAL ERROR : CMN_1011 [Thu Mar 27 11:40:29 2003] : (6772|1) Error allocating
system shared memory of [3000000] bytes for [Load Manager Shared Memory].
Error is [0]: []
FATAL ERROR : SF_34004 [Thu Mar 27 11:40:29 2003] : (6772|1) Server
initialization failed.
INFO : SF_34014 [Thu Mar 27 11:40:29 2003] : (6772|1) Server shut down.
Solution. In the pmserver.cfg file, change MaxSessions to 15 and change
LMSharedMem to 3000000.
NOTE: For each 10 count increase of MaxSessions, increase the LMSharedMem by
2000000 bytes.
Problem. A session fails (any session), and the following error message appears:
TM_6227 Error: codepage incompatible in session [SDE_RecordExtractStart]. The
source database DB2_OLTP and server SIEBEL_DW_SERVER do not have
compatible code pages. (One way compatibility is required).
Solution. For Informatica servers running on UNIX, in the pmserver.cfg file, set
ValidateDataCodePages to No.
For Informatica servers running on Windows, navigate to Informatica Server
setup > Configuration, and remove the check from the Validate Data CodePages
check box.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 235
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
Problem. When trying to start the Informatica Server, the following error message
appears:
sdcb50a125{qauser7a}/> pmserver
exec(): 0509-036 Cannot load program pmserver because of the following errors:
0509-150 Dependent module libpmcef.a could not be loaded.
0509-022 Cannot load module libpmcef.a.
0509-026 System error: A file or directory in the path name does not exist.
Solution. Set the environment parameters as follows:
setenv PATH /export/home/informatica/pm:.:${PATH}
setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH /export/home/informatica/
pm:${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}
Siebel Data Warehouse Application Console (DAC) Issues
Basic Checks
Make sure that you have installed JDK 1.4.1 (and not just the JRE).
Make sure that in the config.bat file for Windows, and the config.sh file for
UNIX, JAVA_HOME is pointing to the JDK (and not the JRE).
Make sure that the DAC_HOME variable has been properly set.
Problem. Email notification does not work:
Solution. To make sure that email notification works with the DAC server, make sure
that the following are true:
To set up the email notification feature, you must bring up the DAC client on
the same machine as the DAC server.
The Email server settings (using the DAC client's server setup) point to a
valid SMTP server.
The SMTP server must be supporting Login Authentication. In Exchange
server, this amounts to enabling the Basic Authentication for SMTP module.
Problem. The DAC server does not start:
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
236 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Solution. When trying to bring up the DAC server, make sure that the following are
taken care of:
The DAC System properties contain the name of the DAC Server Host
machine. This specifies the machine on which the DAC server will be run.
Ensure that this entry is correct, and points to where you are bringing up the
DAC server. Furthermore, there is an entry for the DAC Server OS, which
should specify the OS where the DAC server is running. Ensure that this entry
is correct.
Make sure that the $DAC_HOME/lib directory contains the needed JDBC
libraries.
You may want to edit the startserver.bat file temporarily, and run the DAC
server in such a way that messages show in the command window. (Use
JAVA rather than JAVAW for Windows OS). This will enable you to see a lot
of run-time information, as the server boots up.
In the DAC System properties, there is an entry called Logging Level. You can
increase the amount of information logged by decreasing the logging-
threshold. In other words, if the value currently is SEVERE, make it INFO.
This will show more information. If you can still not find the cause, you may
want to change it to FINE or FINEST. These levels are the standard levels of
Java's Logging API. (SEVERE, WARNING, INFO,CONFIG, FINE, FINER,
FINEST).
Be aware that as you lower the logging threshold, a lot of run-time
information will start getting logged. While this may be advantageous for
troubleshooting, you do not want to leave it like this in production mode.
Excessive logging will generate large log files quickly and use excessive
disk space. There is also a modest performance hit with excessive logging.
Ensure that there is no DAC server already running on the machine. Only one
DAC server instance can exist per machine (and per DAC repository). Some
non-visible forms of the DAC server may be running as a background
process.
Ensure that the DAC repository database instance is actually up and running.
The DAC repository database being down or the loss of network connectivity
to the database will cause the DAC server not to come up, or to go down if it
was running.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 237
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
Make sure that the DAC repository database connection pool size is
moderate. In other words, do not try to acquire an excessive number of
connections when the database administrator may have put restrictions on
how many a single application can request.
Issue. Starting the DAC client and server for the first time:
After configuring the DAC server by using the DAC client, when you bring up the
DAC server, you will notice that the DAC client's icon for the Server status stays red.
In other words, it suggests the server is down, even though it is running.
This is expected behavior. The first time the DAC server comes up against a
repository, it creates a Unique ID for itself, and the repository. Thereafter, when any
client is started against the repository, it knows where to expect the DAC server to
be, and furthermore, sends a valid identification token containing the Unique ID.
Therefore, after bringing up the DAC server the first time, you may want to close the
existing open clients, and bring them up again. This problem is specific to bringing
up the DAC client and server for the first time. Once Unique ID has been created,
the behavior of the Server Monitor icon will be as expected.
Issue. DAC server on AIX versus non-AIX.
Special care must be taken when bringing up the DAC server on AIX machines. For
example, if the repository already contains database connection information entries,
and Informatica server entries, these must be modified if you are moving the DAC
server to an AIX machine.
In particular, you need to delete all the password fields, and re-enter them. For more
information, see Chapter 2, Installing and Configuring Siebel Data Warehouse.
Troubleshooting the Siebel Data Warehouse
238 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 239
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data
Considerations A
This section includes the following topics:
Importing Syndicated Data into Siebel Data Warehouse on page 239
Data Loading Issues with Siebel Data Warehouse on page 247
Supported Incremental Updates in the Siebel Data Warehouse LS Dimension
Tables on page 249
Importing Syndicated Data into Siebel Data Warehouse
This section covers how to import syndicated data into the Siebel Life Sciences
database.
Pharmaceutical companies purchase weekly and monthly sales and prescription
data, known as syndicated data, from third-party vendors such IMS, NDC, and
Cegedim. Syndicated data is read-only data about certain measures that is used for
sales force analysis reporting and customer targeting. Once delivered, this
syndicated data must be loaded into the Siebel ePharma Analytics database in a
timely fashion and made available to users in order for them to make use of sales
force analysis reporting.
The options for loading syndicated data into the Siebel Data Warehouse include the
following:
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Importing Syndicated Data into Siebel Data Warehouse
240 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Loading from the Siebel operational application transactional database (OLTP)
S_SYND_DATA table.
Syndicated data can be loaded from the S_SYND_DATA table into the Siebel Data
Warehouse. Existing syndicated data from the Siebel application OLTP database,
stored in the S_SYND_DATA table, is extracted, transformed, and loaded by
prebuilt routines and populated into the W_SYND_DATA_F and
W_SYND_MKT_F Fact tables in the Siebel Data Warehouse. These tables provide
information to the Rx Sales subject areas and prebuilt Rx Sales dashboards. (For
more information, see the section on Importing, Extracting, and Routing
Syndicated Data in Siebel Life Sciences Guide.)
Siebel ePharma Analytics supports multiple data types and period types.
Therefore, in order to correctly use the ETL process, S_SYND_DATA must be
loaded in a special way to make sure support for all data types and correct
population of the Siebel Data Warehouse (see Siebel Analytics Data Loading
Matrix for Syndicated Data on page 242).
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 241
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Importing Syndicated Data into Siebel Data Warehouse
Loading from a flat file source using syndicated data staging tables.
Syndicated data source files can be loaded directly into Siebel Data Warehouse
staging tables. In the staging tables, Siebel foreign keys are matched with
external sources keys for joining the external source keys with Siebel Analytics
keys.
The Data Loading Matrix (Siebel Analytics Data Loading Matrix for Syndicated
Data on page 242) illustrates the correct loading of S_SYND_DATA data into the
Siebel Data Warehouse. The following data types are supported:
Monthly Rx data by Contact
Monthly indirect sales data by Brick
Monthly indirect sales by Account
Monthly indirect sales by ZIP Code
Monthly direct sales by Account
Monthly direct sales by Brick
Monthly direct sales by ZIP Code
Weekly Rx data by Contact
Monthly plan level Rx Data
Monthly sales marketincentives by ZIP Code
Monthly sales marketmodified by ZIP Code
Monthly plan level physician Rx Data
Monthly Rx data by ZIP Code
Monthly Rx data by Brick
To make sure the data is correctly loaded in the Siebel Data Warehouse, the Siebel
source table, S_SYND_DATA needs to be populated correctly, based on Table 35 on
page 242 and Table 36 on page 246.
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Importing Syndicated Data into Siebel Data Warehouse
242 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Siebel Analytics Data Loading Matrix for Syndicated Data
The Data Loading Matrix, shown in Table 35, and the Attribute by Data Source
Matrix, shown in Table 36 on page 246, are provided to facilitate loading sales and
Rx data. The following list explains the table headings:
Screen. Name of the Siebel Analytics screen.
View. Name of the Siebel Analytics view.
Data Source. Value that determines which view displays the data stored in the
record. The valid values are RXPrf, SlsIndBrk, SlsIndAct, SlsIndZip, SlsDirAct,
SlsDirBrk, SlsDirZip, RXEVM, RXPT, RXSMI, RXSMM, RXXPT, RXZip, and
RXBrk.
Mandatory Id. Value that indicates the ID field that must be non-NULL for a
database record to be displayed in the corresponding view. There are four key
ID fields: Account Id, Contact Id, Territory Id, and Zip Id. For each view listed in
the table, one of these ID fields is required and the other three must be NULL.
Plan Type. Value that indicates the type of plan ID a database record must have
to be displayed in the view.
Table 35. Siebel Analytics Data Loading Matrix
Screen View Dashboard Page Source OLAP table
OLTP Data Source
from
S_SYND_DATA to
populate Source
Star
S_SYND_
DATA
Mandatory
ID
Plan
Type
Rx Sales
Analytics
Sales
Analytics
Pharma
Sales
Market
Share
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
RxPrf Contact ID TOTAL
Rx Sales
Analytics
Sales
Analytics
Pharma
Sales
Product
Growth
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
RxPrf Contact ID TOTAL
Rx Sales
Analytics
Sales
Analytics
Pharma
Sales
Sales
Force
Index
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
RxPrf Contact ID TOTAL
Rx Sales
Analytics
Sales
Analytics
Pharma
Sales
Market
Share
(Brick)
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
SlsIndBrk Area ID TOTAL
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 243
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Importing Syndicated Data into Siebel Data Warehouse
Rx Sales
Analytics
Sales
Analytics
Pharma
Sales
Product
Growth
(Brick)
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
SlsIndBrk Area ID TOTAL
Rx Sales
Analytics
Sales
Analytics
Pharma
Sales
Sales
Force
Index
(Brick)
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
SlsIndBrk Area ID TOTAL
Rx Sales
Analytics
Sales
Objectives
Analytics
Pharma
Objectives
Contact
Frequency
& Reach
W_OBJECTIVE_F RxPrf (NRx,
TRx
Objectives)SlsIn
dZip (Indirect
Sales
Objectives)
Contact
IDZip ID
TOTAL
Rx Sales
Analytics
Sales
Objectives
Analytics
Pharma
Objectives
Account
Frequency
& Reach
W_OBJECTIVE_F RxPrf (NRx,
TRx
Objectives)SlsIn
dZip (Indirect
Sales
Objectives)
Contact
IDZip ID
TOTAL
Rx Sales
Analytics
Sales
Objectives
Analytics
Pharma
Objectives
Contact
Frequency
& Reach
(Brick)
W_OBJECTIVE_F SlsIndBrk Area ID TOTAL
Rx Sales
Analytics
Sales
Objectives
Analytics
Pharma
Objectives
Account
Frequency
& Reach
(Brick)
W_OBJECTIVE_F SlsIndBrk Area ID TOTAL
Call
Activity
Analytics
Contact
Call
Analytics
Pharma
Contact
Call
Effectivene
ss
Contact
Effort vs.
Potential
W_ACT_PROD_F
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
RxPrf Contact ID TOTAL
Call
Activity
Analytics
Contact
Call
Analytics
Pharma
Contact
Call
Effectivene
ss
Contact
Priority &
Indication
W_ACT_PROD_F Not Applicable Not
Applicable
Not
Applicable
Table 35. Siebel Analytics Data Loading Matrix
Screen View Dashboard Page Source OLAP table
OLTP Data Source
from
S_SYND_DATA to
populate Source
Star
S_SYND_
DATA
Mandatory
ID
Plan
Type
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Importing Syndicated Data into Siebel Data Warehouse
244 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Call
Activity
Analytics
Contact
Call
Analytics
Pharma
Contact
Call
Effectivene
ss
Contact
Effort vs.
Potential
(Brick)
W_ACT_PROD_F
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
SlsIndBrk Area ID TOTAL
Call
Activity
Analytics
Contact
Call
Analytics
Pharma
Contact
Call
Effectivene
ss
Contact
Priority &
Indication
(Brick)
W_ACT_PROD_F Not Applicable Not
Applicable
Not
Applicable
Call
Activity
Analytics
Account
Call
Analytics
Pharma
Account
Call
Effectivene
ss
Account
Effort vs.
Potential
W_ACT_PROD_F
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
SlsIndZip Zip ID or
Account ID
TOTAL
Call
Activity
Analytics
Account
Call
Analytics
Pharma
Account
Call
Effectivene
ss
Account
Priority &
Indication
W_ACT_PROD_F Not Applicable Not
Applicable
Not
Applicable
Call
Activity
Analytics
Account
Call
Analytics
Pharma
Account
Call
Effectivene
ss
Account
Effort vs.
Potential
(Brick)
W_ACT_PROD_F
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
SlsIndBrk Area ID TOTAL
Call
Activity
Analytics
Account
Call
Analytics
Pharma
Account
Call
Effectivene
ss
Account
Priority &
Indication
(Brick)
W_ACT_PROD_F Not Applicable Not
Applicable
Not
Applicable
Pharma
ROI
Analytics
Call
Activity
Profit &
Loss
Analytics
Pharma
Call
Activity
Profit &
Loss
Call
Activity
Profit &
Loss
W_ACT_PROD_F
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
RxPrf Contact ID TOTAL
Table 35. Siebel Analytics Data Loading Matrix
Screen View Dashboard Page Source OLAP table
OLTP Data Source
from
S_SYND_DATA to
populate Source
Star
S_SYND_
DATA
Mandatory
ID
Plan
Type
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 245
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Importing Syndicated Data into Siebel Data Warehouse
Pharma
ROI
Analytics
Call
Activity
Profit &
Loss
Analytics
Pharma
Call
Activity
Profit &
Loss
(Brick)
Call
Activity
Profit &
Loss
(Brick)
W_ACT_PROD_F
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
SlsIndBrk Area ID TOTAL
Medical
Education
Analytics
MedEd
Analytics
Pharma
Medical
Education
Event
Analysis
W_MED_ED_F Not Applicable Not
Applicable
Not
Applicable
Medical
Education
Analytics
MedEd
Analytics
Pharma
Medical
Education
Speaker
Analysis
W_MED_ED_F Not Applicable Not
Applicable
Not
Applicable
Medical
Education
Analytics
MedEd
Analytics
Pharma
Medical
Education
Budget
Analysis
W_MED_ED_F Not Applicable Not
Applicable
Not
Applicable
Medical
Education
Analytics
MedEd
Analytics
Pharma
Medical
Education
Event ROI W_MED_ED_FW_
SYND_DATA_F
RxPrf Contact ID TOTAL
Sales Rep
Analytics
Sales Rep
Analytics
Sales Rep
Analytics
Activity W_ACT_PROD_F
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
RxPrf Contact ID TOTAL
Sales Rep
Analytics
Sales Rep
Analytics
Sales Rep
Analytics
Sales W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
RxPrf Contact ID TOTAL
Sales Rep
Analytics
Sales Rep
Analytics
Sales Rep
Analytics
Customer W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
RxPrf Contact ID TOTAL
Sales Rep
Analytics
Sales Rep
Analytics
Sales Rep
Analytics
Objective W_OBJECTIVE_F RxPrf (NRx,
TRx
Objectives)SlsIn
dZip (Indirect
Sales
Objectives)
Contact
IDZip ID
TOTAL
Table 35. Siebel Analytics Data Loading Matrix
Screen View Dashboard Page Source OLAP table
OLTP Data Source
from
S_SYND_DATA to
populate Source
Star
S_SYND_
DATA
Mandatory
ID
Plan
Type
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Importing Syndicated Data into Siebel Data Warehouse
246 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Data Source Values for Syndicated Data Attributes
Table 36 indicates, by data source, the data values that should be loaded into the
syndicated data table (S_SYND_DATA) attribute fields.
NOTE: Analytics Codes are used in the Life Sciences logical model to identify the
syndicated data sources.
Pharma
Executive
Analytics
Sales
Executive
Analytics
Pharma
Sales
Executive
Analytics
Sales
Overview
Page
W_ACT_PROD_F
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
W_OBJECTIVE_F
W_MED_ED_F
RxPrfSlsIndZip Contact
IDZip ID
Pharma
Executive
Analytics
Sales
Executive
Analytics
Pharma
Sales
Executive
Analytics
Sales
Overview
Page
(Brick)
W_ACT_PROD_F
W_SYND_DATA_F
W_SYND_MKT_F
W_OBJECTIVE_F
W_MED_ED_F
RxPrfSlsIndBrk Contact
IDArea ID
Table 35. Siebel Analytics Data Loading Matrix
Screen View Dashboard Page Source OLAP table
OLTP Data Source
from
S_SYND_DATA to
populate Source
Star
S_SYND_
DATA
Mandatory
ID
Plan
Type
Table 36. S_SYND_DATA Attribute by Data Source
Data Source Description Analytics Codes Attribute 1 Attribute 2 Attribute 3 Attribute 4
RXPrf Prescription data
by Contact
1 NRx TRx Market NRx Market TRx
SlsIndBrk Indirect Sales Brick
Level
22 Product Sales $ Product Sales
Units
Market Sales $ Market Sales
Units
SlsIndAct Indirect Sales
Account Level
21 Product Sales $ Product Sales
Units
Market Sales $ Market Sales
Units
SlsIndZip Indirect Sales Zip
Level
23 Product Sales $ Product Sales
Units
Market Sales $ Market Sales
Units
SlsDirAct Direct Sales
Account Level
11 Product Sales $ Product Sales
Units
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 247
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Data Loading Issues with Siebel Data Warehouse
The following issues are specific to Analytics for Life Sciences and do not affect
other products.
Data Loading Issues with Siebel Data Warehouse
Supported Incremental Updates in the Siebel Data Warehouse LS Dimension
Tables on page 249
Data Loading Issues with Siebel Data Warehouse
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences updates the Siebel Data Warehouse with a
full refresh or using incremental updates. In Informatica, the Full_Load_Siebel_DW
workflow does a complete refresh and is usually only used for the initial build.
Refresh_Siebel_DW incrementally updates the Siebel Data Warehouse.
SlsDirBrk Direct Sales Brick
Level
12 Product Sales $ Product Sales
Units
SlsDirZip Direct Sales Zip
Level
13 Product Sales $ Product Sales
Units
RXEVM Weekly RX Data 0 Product NRx Product TRx Market NRx Market TRx
RXPT Plan Level Rx Data 6 Product NRx Product TRx Market NRx Market TRx
RXSMI Sales Market -
Incentives
3 Product NRx Product TRx Market NRx Market TRx
RXSMM Sales Market -
Modified
4 Product NRx Product TRx Market NRx Market TRx
RXXPT Plan Level
Physician Rx Data
5 Product NRx Product TRx Market NRx Market TRx
RXZip Prescription data
by ZIP Code
7 Product NRx Product TRx Market NRx Market TRx
RXBrk Prescription data
by Brick
8 Product NRx Product TRx Market NRx Market TRx
Table 36. S_SYND_DATA Attribute by Data Source
Data Source Description Analytics Codes Attribute 1 Attribute 2 Attribute 3 Attribute 4
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Data Loading Issues with Siebel Data Warehouse
248 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Running Full_Load_Siebel_DW deletes all existing information stored in the fact
and dimension tables. The following types of incremental updates rules are
supported on the fact tables.
Activity Product Fact. Add new records (call activity) to the fact table.
Rx Sales (syndicated data) Fact. ETL does not support incremental updates. When
running Full_Load_Siebel_DW, all records in the fact and dimension tables are
deleted. To maintain a history in the dimension tables (such as multiple
alignments), use Refresh_Siebel_DW. If you need to incrementally update the
RxSales fact table for incremental syndicated data loading, use one of the
following strategies:
For incremental insert. Load the data directly into staging and modify the
session not to truncate the fact table. Then use the existing ETL to load it to
the fact table.
For incremental update. Create a new mapping that does a lookup against the
fact table and run the update.
Objective. Add new records as per the new ePharma Objective. Update existing
records with a changed ePharma Objective to the fact table.
Profile Rank. Add new records to the fact table and update existing records in the
fact table.
Med Ed. Add new MedEd events to the fact table. A MedEd event is assumed to
be locked in the Siebel ePharma MedEd. If the information is changed in an
existing MedEd event, the ETL creates a new record in the fact table. If an
existing MedEd event is changed, the ETL process does not load the data. The
ETL always skips already loaded MedEd events.
Known Issues with the RxSales Fact Table
The following are known issues with creation of aggregate measure columns in the
RxSales fact table.
With large volumes of syndicated data, the creation of aggregate measures in the
Siebel Data Warehouse can take four times the amount of time needed to load
the fact table. This may be unacceptable under circumstances when there are
large amounts of syndicated data.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 249
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Supported Incremental Updates in the Siebel Data Warehouse LS Dimension Tables
All aggregate measures have been recreated at the metadata level except for
MAT. MAT can be entered as a formula for ad-hoc analysis in Siebel ePharma
Answers using the function msum(measure, window). For more information,
see Siebel Analytics User Guide.
The LS syndicated fact table contains following aggregate measure columns to
speed enterprise wide reporting: TTD, TTDLY, TTDPT, MAT, YTD. To update
these aggregate columns ETL process requires following steps:
Upgrading aggregate columns
1 Join the syndicated data to the day dimension to denormalize by time.
2 Create a second set of time denormalized syndicated data.
3 Join these two data sets to obtain appropriate measure for TTD, TTDLY, TTDPT,
MAT, and YTD aggregation.
4 Aggregate the measures.
5 Update the syndicated data aggregate columns.
Supported Incremental Updates in the Siebel Data
Warehouse LS Dimension Tables
In the LS dimension tables, the following incremental updates are supported. Some
dimensions have more than one set of attributes.
W_ALIGNMT_DH
Slowly Changing Dimension Type. 2
Attribute. Link between ZIP, Brick, Account, and Contact Hierarchy
Description. Tracks historical alignments.
If ETL Alignment Version is set to N, ETL makes changes to existing alignment
if there is a change on an assignment rule.
If ETL Alignment Version is set to Y, it creates a new alignment version.
The dimension has these characteristics:
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Supported Incremental Updates in the Siebel Data Warehouse LS Dimension Tables
250 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
The first alignment after Full load is 1.
A new version is created when a new assignment rule (new position or
position relationship) or an assignment criteria is modified (change in postal
code, brick, contact, or account) if ETL Alignment Version is set to Y.
Activation date changes have to be entered manually. The ETL looks for the
change and creates a new version, even though the rules have not been
applied to the Siebel transactional database.
Assignment criteria:
Contact ZIP Code or Account ZIP Code cannot use ZIP Code ranges. Each
ZIP Code assigned to a territory needs to be on a separate row, so the
same value needs to be entered for both ZIP Code Low and ZIP Code
High.
For example, if ZIP Code 09654 is assigned to a territory, the value for
both ZIP Code High and ZIP Code Low should be 09654. Also, the same
ZIP Code should not be assigned twice to the same territory and a ZIP
Code should be unique to a territory when using assignment criteria for
Contact ZIP Code or Account ZIP Code.
Contact Brick or Account Brick require unique bricks assigned to a
territory.
Every new version increases the counter by one and is a sequential number.
When a dimension table gets too large, your administrator can create an SQL
query to delete all attributes for version numbers.
Effective date of the alignment is assignment activation date.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 251
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Supported Incremental Updates in the Siebel Data Warehouse LS Dimension Tables
W_ORG_D
Slowly Changing Dimension Type. 3
Attributes. ACCNT_TYPE_CD, ACCNT_TYPE_CD1, ACCNT_TYPE_CD2,
ACCNT_TYPE_CD3
Description. Tracks three past account types. If the account type changes a fourth
time, the first change is deleted and only the past three changes are maintained.
Effective date is ETL run date to each group of attributes.
Attributes. NAME, NAME1, NAME2, NAME3
Description. Tracks three past account names. If the account name changes a
fourth time, the first change is deleted and only the past three changes are
maintained. Effective date is ETL run date.
Attributes. NUMB_OF_BEDS, NUMB_OF_BEDS1, NUMB_OF_BEDS2,
NUMB_OF_BEDS3
Description. For an account type of hospital and clinic, tracks three past
quantities. If the number of beds changes a fourth time, the first change is
deleted and only the past three changes are maintained. Effective date is ETL run
date.
Attributes. PAR_INTEGRATION_ID, PAR_ITGR_ID1, PAR_ITGR_ID2,
PAR_ITGR_ID3
Description. Tracks three past parent accounts. If the parent account changes a
fourth time, the first change is deleted and only the past three changes are
maintained. Effective date is ETL run date.
W_POSTN_CON_D
Slowly Changing Dimension Type. 3
Attributes. STATUS, STATUS1, STATUS2, STATUS3
Description. Tracks three past contact statuses. If the contact status changes a
fourth time, the first change is deleted and only the past three changes are
maintained. Effective date is ETL run date.
Siebel Data Warehouse for Life Sciences Data Considerations
Supported Incremental Updates in the Siebel Data Warehouse LS Dimension Tables
252 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
W_POSITION_D
Slowly Changing Dimension Type. 3
Attributes. EMP_FST_NAME, EMP_MID_NAME, EMP_LAST_NAME,
EMP_FST_NAME_H1, EMP_MID_NAME_H1, EMP_LAST_NAME_H1,
EMP_FST_NAME_H2, EMP_MID_NAME_H2, EMP_LAST_NAME_H2,
EMP_FST_NAME_H3, EMP_MID_NAME_H3, EMP_LAST_NAME_H3
Description. Tracks three past employee names assigned to a position. If the
employee name changes a fourth time, the first change is deleted and only the
past three changes are maintained. Effective date is ETL run date.
W_PROD_RANK_D
Slowly Changing Dimension Type. 3
Attributes. RANKING, RANKING1, RANKING2, RANKING3
Description. Keep three previous rankings to allow restatement. Effective date is
ETL run date.
Attributes. RATING, RATING1, RATING2, RATING3
Description. Keep three previous ratings to allow restatement. Effective date is
ETL run date.
W_PRODUCT_D
Slowly Changing Dimension Type. 3
Attributes. VENDOR_LOC, VENDOR_LOC1, VENDOR_LOC2, VENDOR_LOC3
Description. Tracks three past vendor locations. If the vendor location changes a
fourth time, the first change is deleted and only the past three changes are
maintained. Effective date is ETL run date.
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 253
Index
A
ANSI NULL option, setting 36
B
bulkload mode, error while creating a
custom session 230
C
circular hierarchy exceptions, about and
example 200
Cost List exceptions
See also exception reports
about and example 199
Cost lists, using to display 204
products without a cost list 199
currency, diagnosing translation
issues 204
D
data flow
Online Analytical Processing (OLAP)
database, about and diagram 16
data import
data loading matrix, table of 242
syndicated data loading, overview 239
data loading
See also Data Loading Matrix
Siebel Analytics for Life Sciences, issues
when loading 247
troubleshooting, Informatica and data
loading issues 226
Data Loading Matrix
table of 242
Data Source Matrix, table of 246
database connections, creating
DB2 installations, creating database
connections for 55
Oracle installation, creating database
connections for 55
DB Library Options setting, modifying 36
DB2
database connections, creating for 55
Siebel Data Warehouse requirements 29
Siebel Data Warehouse, cannot connect
to 225
E
email notification, Outlook error when
sending post session email 229
Enterprise Manager, error displayed after
installing ODBC driver 225
errors
See troubleshooting
ETL History view, using to view the history
of the ETL processes and statuses 205
exception reports
See also Cost List exceptions; system
preferences
additional exceptions, list of 205
circular hierarchy exceptions, about and
example 200
cleansing the data, process and
diagram 201
ETL History view, using to view the
history of the ETL processes and
statuses 205
exception report components, list of 197
exception, fixing 202
exchange rate exceptions, about 199
Index
254 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
Exchange Rate view, using to diagnose
currency translation issues 204
executing the report, cleansing steps 201
invalid hierarchy exceptions, about 200
List of Values exceptions 197
List of Values view, using to compare
values with Siebel Data
Warehouse 203
exchange rate exceptions, about 199
Exchange Rate view, using to diagnose
currency issues 204
F
Full_Extract_Siebel_DW, error returned by
Informatica 227
Full_Load_Siebel_DW
error when running 227
Full_Load_Siebel_DW_Facts, error message
when executing 228
H
hierarchical relationships, invalid hierarchy
exceptions, about 200
I
Informatica client software
Enable Data Code Pages Validation,
checking if conditions met 53
PowerMart Client, installing on the
Administrator Workstation 52
Informatica Metadata Reporter (IMR)
error when running, probable cause 230
Informatica PowerMart Client, installing on
the Administrator Workstation 52
Informatica Repository Manager
configuring, when starting 70
Informatica Server
installing on other than default
location 71
Informatica Server and repository,
configuring
Informatica repository, configuring 70
Informatica Server host name, verifying
the change 69
Unicode mode, about running 40
Unicode mode, configuring under
Windows 46
Windows, setting up Informatica service
under 71
Informatica Server host name
verifying that it has been changed 69
Informatica Service, unable to start on
Windows 72
installation
Informatica client software 52
Informatica Server, installing on other
than default directory 71
troubleshooting issues 225
L
List of Values
exceptions, about and example 197
view, using to compare values with the
Siebel Data Warehouse 203
LS dimension tables, supported incremental
updates (table) 249
M
Mandatory Id fields, description 242
Microsoft Outlook
closes when finishing ETL process,
probable cause 230
error when sending post session
email 229
O
OLAP
See Online Analytical Processing
database
Online Analytical Processing database
about 28
Data Warehouse, data flow into 16
Online Transaction Processing database
Version 7.7, Rev. A Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide 255
Index
Online Analytical Processing database,
differences from 28
OPB_OBJECT_LOCKS Informatica session
deadlocked, probable cause 229
Oracle
database connections, creating for 55
mappings hang, probable cause 226
Siebel Data Warehouse requirements 32
Outlook
closes when finishing ETL process,
probable cause 230
error when sending post session
email 229
P
parent-child relationship, circular hierarchy
exceptions 200
performance
components configured to optimize
performance 37
plan types, data loading matrix value 242
PowerMart Client, installing on the
Administrator Workstation 52
Q
Query Analyzer, can not open after
installing ODBC driver 225
R
RDBMS error message, probable
cause 228
Refresh_Extract_Siebel_DW
error returned by Informatica 227
repository
See Informatica Repository Manager;
Informatics Repository, administering
S
S_SYND_DATA attribute by data source
matrix, table of 246
SDE_RecordLoadStart session fails,
probable cause 228
SDEINC_RecordExtractStart session fails,
probable cause 228
server components, installation
requirements
See also server component software
Siebel Data Warehouse, about 28
Windows 2000, additional Data
Warehouse server requirements 39
Siebel Analytics for Life Sciences
data loading issues 247
LS dimension tables, supported
incremental updates (table) 249
Siebel Data Warehouse
DB2 requirements 29
Oracle requirements 32
SQL server-specific requirements 36
troubleshooting configuration
issues 225
Siebel ePharma
data loading matrix, table of 242
Siebel Transaction Database
connection error 225
Cost lists, displaying 204
Siebel transactional database
Siebel Data Warehouse, differences
from 28
SQL Server
DB Library Options setting,
modifying 36
Siebel Data Warehouse requirements 36
syndicated data
importing, overview 239
table (S_SYND_DATA), attribute
fields 246
system preferences
See also exception reports
T
tablespace, Oracle-specific
requirements 34
Test entry 99, 225, 247
troubleshooting
Informatica and data loading issues 226
Index
256 Siebel Data Warehouse Installation and Administration Guide Version 7.7, Rev. A
installation and configuration
issues 225
U
Unicode mode
multibyte or ISO 8859-1, about running
Informatica Server in 40
Windows, configuring under 46
W
Windows
Informatica Server, setting up under 71
Unicode mode, configuring under
Windows 46
Windows 2000
Data Warehouse server requirements,
additional 39
workflows
error message when executing on the
Informatica Server Manager, probable
cause 226
Server Manager error message, probable
cause 226